Agfa CR30-X PDF

HEALTHCARE
ReadMeFirst
Service Manual for Download
Imaging Services
Purpose of this Document

This document describes how to
add the order list for documentation.
print.
add comments.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2
06-2008
Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a

printed manual. See section 1.
Edition 1, Revision 2
06-2008 printed in Germany
Agfa Company Confidential
Document Node ID: 16099429
Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
ReadMeFirst
Integrating the Order List for Documentation

IMPORTANT:
The order list for documentation is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the order list for documentation:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select Order list and Front page PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation.
(3) Download the order list for documentation to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if
available.
Some pages especially circuit diagrams for equipment have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
06-2008
Page 2 of 5
ReadMeFirst
2.1
Printing single Pages or Chapters

To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:
(1)
Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2)
Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar

(3)
Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.
(4)
Select "Print".
(5)
Select the page range.
(6)
Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7)
Select OK.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters

06-2008
Page 3 of 5
ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
Shrink to printable area may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
reduce to printer margins or shrink oversized pages to paper size.
2.2
Printing the complete Service Manual

To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:
(1)
Select "Print".
(2)
Select All.
(3)
Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"

(see NOTE above).
(4)
Select OK.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
Adding Comments
If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar

06-2008
Page 4 of 5
ReadMeFirst
3.1
Exporting your Comments

NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1)
In the drop down menu Comment & Markup select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu Comment & Markup
3.2
(2)
Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3)
Select Options - Export Selected Comments.
(4)
Save the file with any name.
Importing Comments
(1)
In the drop down menu Comment & Markup select "Show comments List".
(2)
Select Options - Import Comments.
(3)
Browse for the comments file and press select.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.

06-2008
Page 5 of 5
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
Service Manual
Document No: DD+DIS230.10E
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
1st Edition*
* For the revision status per chapter please refer to the latest version of the Checklist for Completeness
in the Agfa HealthCare Library.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
The controlled version of this document is available from the Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
06-2011 Printed in Germany

eq_00_about manual_e_template_v08
DD+DIS230.10E
About this Manual
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Published by
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
Agfa and the Agfa rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1)
Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document

(see Agfa HealthCare Library > General Info > Agfa HealthCare > Publications >
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2)
Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
IMPORTANT:
The installation and service of the product(s) described herein is to be performed
by qualified personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates
or who are otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide
such services.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of a chapter of the Service Manual refer to the Checklist for
Completeness in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 0 / Page 2 of 6
DD+DIS230.10E
About this Manual

This document provides information on the structure and contents of the CR 30-X 2nd
Service Manual.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial Version

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
About this Manual
Chapter Overview
Chapter
0
Order List
Generic Safety Directions
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
Functional Description
Repair and Service

3.1
Machine specific Safety and Repair Information
3.2
Tools and auxiliary Means
3.3
Troubleshooting
3.4
Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
3.5
Replacement of Parts
3.6
Adjustments and Calibrations
3.7
Software Menus and Setting
3.8
Software Releases, Patches
Reference and Circuit Diagrams
Spare Parts List
Accessories
Field Modifications
Manufacturing Standard Modifications
Maintenance
10
Service Bulletins
11
Installation Planning
12
Glossary

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
About this Manual
Explanation of Notes
Safety relevant Notes
Icon
Signal Word
Situation
CAUTION:
Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any
other equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can
be the consequence.
WARNING:
Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user,

engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER:
Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the

consequence.
Not-safety relevant Notes

Icon
Name
Type of Information
INSTRUCTION:
Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally

the described actions.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out

to prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action

without having a direct influence on the step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the

graphical user interface.
Conventions
Highlighting of Tasks
Task number
Task Description
Remark
(1)
Connect the cable.
(2)
Switch the machine on.
Examples for working steps to be performed in

the listed sequence.
Highlighting of Buttons, Functions and Names within a Task

(1)
Press <F9> or double-click the

<Refresh> button.
Examples are: Menu topics, keyboard keys,

icons, device buttons, commands etc.
(2)
Enter file name.
In this example a file name has to be entered

as term.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
About this Manual
About this Manual

This Service Manual provides information for the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer with following
type numbers:
Type 5175, subtype 200 = CR 30-X 2/60 Digitizer
Type 5175, subtype 220 = CR White 2/60 Digitizer
The CR 30-X 2nd digitizer is part of the CR system, comprising:
Digitizer
Cassette(s) with image plate(s)
NX workstation
Digitizer
Cassette
517500ab.cdr
NX Workstation
Figure 1
Download
from Agfa
Healthcare
Library
The CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual is available on Agfa HealthCare Library:

Computed Radiography CR Digitizers CR 30-X 2nd
Intended
Use
This device must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing
an erasable image plate (IP).
The digitizer is part of a CR system, consisting of X-ray cassettes with erasable
phosphor image plates and a NX workstation where the X-ray cassettes are identified
and the resulting digital image information is further processed and routed.
This Service Manual does not cover:
The CR 30-X type 5175 with subtypes 100, 105, 110, 120 and 125
Refer to CR 30-X Service Manual, DD+DIS150.06E, available on
Agfa HealthCare Library: Computed Radiography CR Digitizers
CR 30-X
The NX Workstation type 4403.

Refer to the Service Manuals available on Agfa HealthCare Library:
Computed Radiography CR Workstation Software

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services

for HealthCare Imaging Products

This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information including
relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each Service Documentation as well as
Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via MedNet, GSO Library path:
General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
compared to previous Revision 1.2:
1.3
07-2009
Updated table with laser classification to latest changes of the

corresponding standard. See section 3.3.
Added section Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions.
See section 9.
Added safety note concerning inroom installations of CR equipment
and corresponding X-ray shielding. See section 17.
Added laser safety note and safety note concerning electrical checks
after repairs. See section 19.
Added treatment for Lithium batteries in sections 19 and 21.
Updated information concerning the recycling pass. See section 24.
Referenced Documents
Document
Title
Not applicable
Not applicable


eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
DD+DIS238.06E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
(2)
the product.

07-2009
Page 2 of 28
Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products
DD+DIS238.06E
LIST OF CONTENTS
DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5
USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6
LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7
3.1
CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2
System Labels ......................................................................................... 7
3.3
System Labels concerning Laser Radiation ............................................ 8
PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10
REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10
INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11
INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11
QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11
ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12
10
CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13
11
ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14
12
COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14
13
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17
14
RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18
15
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18
16
GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19
17
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20
18
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22
19
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23
20
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

07-2009
Page 3 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
21
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................27
22
SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27
23
SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27
24
RECYCLING ........................................................................................................27
25
WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28
26
ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

07-2009
Page 4 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified
personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with
respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you dont
operate the product correctly or if you dont have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

07-2009
Page 5 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Used Icons
Icon
Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!

07-2009
Page 6 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Labels
3.1
CE Mark
CE Mark
3.2
This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)

becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface
Obstacles
Laser Beam
Corrosive Liquid
Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
High Voltage
Hand Injuries
C&W_005.cdr

07-2009
Page 7 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
3.3
System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class #
Meaning
Class 1:
Not dangerous to the human eye, even

when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects,
especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Class 1 M:
Class 2:
Not dangerous to the human eye if no

optical instruments (magnifying glass or
binocular) are used.
Can nevertheless produce irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Dangerous to the human eye for
intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury.
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating
conditions.
Example Label
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM

07-2009
Page 8 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Class #
Meaning
Class 2M:
Dangerous to the human eye when

staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of
optical instruments. Can produce
dazzling and irritating effects even for
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds,
especially at low ambient light conditions.
Class 3R:
Example Label
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
conditions.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
Class 3B:
Normally dangerous to the human eye

for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Class 4:
Dangerous to the human eye for direct

view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION

07-2009
Page 9 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa Gevaert N.V.

Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485
References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf

07-2009
Page 10 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic XRay
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks

This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make
sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the
force of law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

07-2009
Page 11 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions

Each Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:
Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
Shall familiarise himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Co-ordinator, Global HSE Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

07-2009
Page 12 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
10
Connections to other Equipment

Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.

Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed
in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC
60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

07-2009
Page 13 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
11
Accessories and Spare Parts

Parts and accessories replacement:
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
12
Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.
Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:
Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system

ISO 13485
ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.

07-2009
Page 14 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products

IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance
ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices Application of risk management to medical devices
IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME
SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential
in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the
electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment
of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and
provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org

07-2009
Page 15 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

07-2009
Page 16 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
13
Safety Directions for Operation

Accessibility of the mains power switch:
CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
Technical Documentation.
All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
Ventilation openings must not be covered.
If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which
may cause an explosion.

07-2009
Page 17 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
14
Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction
in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by
the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all
radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
15
Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.

07-2009
Page 18 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
16
General Safety Directions for Service Activities
This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

07-2009
Page 19 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
17
Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities

Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) Equipment against scattered X-Rays:
Warning:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device

when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.

07-2009
Page 20 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:
CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

07-2009
Page 21 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
18
Safety Directions for Installation Activities
If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

07-2009
Page 22 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Ground potential differences:

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
19
Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as
the PC.
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments

a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the
OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.

07-2009
Page 23 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.
Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
When removing lithium batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to
avoid short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.
Performing the electrical test according to national regulations:

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead to
electric shocks.
After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains voltage
inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical test
according to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.
NOTE:
On MedNet, GSO Library path "General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual" a form IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation for CR Digitizers is
available, to be handed out to the responsible organization (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
07-2009
Page 24 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:

WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.
INSTRUCTION:
Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
Do not look into the laser beam.
Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the Functional Description in the
corresponding service manual.
Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.

07-2009
Page 25 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
Unplug before opening.
Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
20
Safety Directions for remote Service Activities

Remote Service Activities:
Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.

07-2009
Page 26 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
21
Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
22
In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.
Safety Directions concerning Modifications

Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be
implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
23
Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials

'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The Hazardous Material
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
24
Recycling
Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for all equipment. The Recycling
Passport explains whether hazardous materials, special components and batteries are
present, where they are located and how they can be removed at the end of the life cycle.
The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle end-of-life Agfa equipment.
To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.

07-2009
Page 27 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
25
Waste Disposal
On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.
The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to
prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.
Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be
different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.
26
Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)

AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customers site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.

07-2009
Page 28 of 28
Chapter 1
HEALTHCARE
Controls, Connections,
and Setup Procedures
Imaging Services
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225

This document describes:
All important routines to be carried out prior to putting the machine in operation
Location and function of the controls and connectors of the machine
All routines necessary to put an unpacked machine in operation
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
compared to previous version 1.0
1.1
07-2011
Added information about Error Viewer in section 2.3.
Updated configuration settings in section 2.4.
Updated performing back up in section 4.2.
Document
Title
DD+DIS229.10E
CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual,

Chapter 11 - Installation Planning
DD+DIS230.10E

Chapter 3.2 - Tools and auxiliary means
DD+DIS340.10E
NX workstation Service Manual,

Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration


eq_01_setup_procedure_e_template_v08
DD+DIS230.10E
Controls, Connections, and Setup Procedures
Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
LIST OF CONTENTS
1
INSTALLATION PREPARATION .............................................................................................4

1.1
Checking Installation Site Prerequisites ...................................................................................4
1.2
Preparing the required Tools ....................................................................................................5
1.3
Unpacking the Digitizer .............................................................................................................6
1.4
Checking the Shipment Completeness.....................................................................................9
CONNECTING THE DIGITIZER TO THE NX WORKSTATION.............................................10

2.1
Connecting the Cables............................................................................................................10
2.2
Switching on the Digitizer and NX Workstation ......................................................................12
2.3
Installation of the Error Viewer on NX Workstation.................................................................13
2.4
Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings ...........................................................13
2.5
Testing Standalone Installation...............................................................................................16
2.6
Filling in Site specific Data ......................................................................................................17
2.7
Checking Software Version.....................................................................................................17
2.8
Configuring the Maintenance Indicator (Optional) ..................................................................18
CONFIGURING THE DIGITIZER AND THE NX WORKSTATION FOR THE HOSPITAL

NETWORK .............................................................................................................................19
COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION .......................................................................................22
4.1
Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System ............................................................22
4.1.1
Checking the Image Plate before Exposure ...........................................................................22
4.1.2
Erasing the Cassette...............................................................................................................24
4.1.3
Creating the Flatfield Test Image............................................................................................25
4.1.4
Scanning the Flatfield Image ..................................................................................................26
4.1.5
Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station .......................................................27
4.2
Performing a Backup ..............................................................................................................29
4.3
Hand-over of the System to the Clinical Application Specialist ..............................................29
4.3.1
Setup of Connectivity to additional System Components .......................................................30
4.3.2
Customizing System Components according to Customer Preferences................................30
4.3.3
Customer Training ..................................................................................................................30
4.3.4
Performing further Activities depending on local Regulations ................................................32
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST .................................................................................................33

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Installation Preparation
This document describes the installation and configuration of the digitizer.
NOTE:
It is additionally required to perform installation and configuration of the
NX Workstation. Refer to Chapter 4 of the corresponding NX Workstation
version in the Agfa HealthCare Library:
<Computed Radiography CR Workstation Software>
For installation instructions of optional digitizer components like All-in-one Cart,
UPS or Mobile Kit refer to the accompanying document of the option.
NOTE:
The Installation Checklist in section 5 of this chapter gives an overview of all steps
of the digitizer installation and guides through the complete installation process.
This section is split up into the following steps:
1.1
Task Overview
Section
Checking installation site prerequisites
1.1
Preparing required tools.
1.2
Unpacking the digitizer
1.3
Checking the shipment completeness
1.4
Checking Installation Site Prerequisites

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 15 minutes
(1)
Confirm that all prerequisites described in the "Installation readiness checklist"

are fulfilled.
Refer to the checklist in CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual chapter 11, Installation
Planning.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(2)
(3)
Download the following documents from the Agfa HealthCare Library before
starting with the installation:
Solution Structure Data Document, Document ID* 30781759

(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326,

Check whether the new ordered system components and the already
available equipment on site (if available) can be used together in the system.
* Access the document by entering the document ID in the Agfa HealthCare Library search window,
or follow the direct link.
1.2
Preparing the required Tools

Following required tools are part of digitizer delivery:
TX 20
TX 45
Limit Pattern CD ROM

Spare part number*: CM+9 5175 9160 0
USB Stick (USB Flash Drive)

Checked to be virus free
Spare part number*: CM+6027410
1.5 mm Copper Filter
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Following required tools are not part of digitizer delivery:

Lint free cloth
Commercially available, acquire locally
Cutter
Commercially available, acquire locally
CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner (2 bottles)
Spare part number*: 10+9 9999 1197 0
1.3
Unpacking the Digitizer

REQUIRED TIME:
(1)
Compare the labels on the boxes with the customers order list and the
shipping papers.
(2)
Check the packing material for visible transport damage such as:
(3)
Dented edges
Damage on the box
Torn fixing elements (metal straps)
Check the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes.

White field is OK.
Red field is not OK.
STOSSEMPFINDLICH
Figure 1

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
IMPORTANT:
If the device was tilted, the circle in the arrow head of the TILTWATCH changes
from white to red.
If the device was subjected to shocks, the square field in the middle of the
SHOCKWATCH changes from white to red.
If damages are visible from the outside, perform the following step:
Inform the carrier. This damage must be noted down in the handover documents.
If the device should be replaced, perform the following step:
Contact your local AGFA representative.
If no damage is visible from the outside, perform the following step:
Start installation. If device doesnt work, contact your local AGFA representative.
(4)
Unpack the digitizer. The unpacking instructions are printed on the digitizer box.
Figure 2 shows an example of the unpacking instructions.
Figure 2

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
WARNING:
The digitizer is heavy (72.5 kg; 159.8 lb). Risk of injuries when lifting the digitizer.
At least two persons have to lift the digitizer from one position to the other.
When removing scanner only one person is needed to lift the digitizer from one
position to the other.
Use proper foot and hand protection when lifting the digitizer.
WARNING:
Excessive vibrations during scanning may decrease image quality.
The structure and stability of the used table need to be suitable in relation with the
size and weight of the system. The table may not be subject to excessive shock and
vibrations from other sources.
For more information refer to the CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual, Installation Planning
document DD+DIS229.10E in the Agfa HealthCare Library:
<Computed Radiography CR Digitizers CR 30-X 2nd
Service Manual>
(5)
Lift the digitizer from the pallet on the provided table.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
1.4
Checking the Shipment Completeness

(1)
Compare the scope of delivery with the packing list.

Example for packing list:
Quantity
Description
Digitizer
Packing list for Accessory
CE declaration of conformity
Installation Procedure
(Chapters 1 and 11 of the Technical Documentation)
Power cable, Europe 3.00 m
Power cable, US 3.00 m
Network cable 5 m / 16 feet long
1.5 mm CU filter
USB stick with Software for the digitizer (delivered with the digitizer)
Torx Key TX20
Torx Key TX45
CD with limit patterns for flatfield evaluation
CD with User Manuals in all specified languages**
* RoHS = Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances

** Language: Chinese-simplified, Chinese-traditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish,
French, German, Greek, Italian, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish,
Swedish, Thai, Vietnamese, Estonian, Hungarian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Slovak, Slovenian, Turkish
(2)
In case the delivery is not complete contact the following representative:
For AGFA employees: Contact the Regional Support Network (RSN)
For external partners: Contact your local Agfa representative

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Connecting the Digitizer to the NX Workstation

REQUIRED TIME:
This section is split up into the following steps:
2.1
Task Overview
Section
Connecting the cables.
2.1
Switching on the digitizer and NX Workstation.
2.2
Installing of the Error Viewer on NX Workstation.
2.3
Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings.
2.4
Testing standalone installation.
2.5
Filling in site specific data.
2.6
Checking of the software version.
2.7
Configuring the maintenance indicator.
2.8
Connecting the Cables

IMPORTANT:
Do not yet connect the digitizer and NX Workstation to the hospital network.
Connecting the digitizer and the NX Workstation into the hospital network is performed
after the network configuration of both.
NOTE:
The digitizer is delivered with two power cables for US/Europe. If a different cable
is needed, organize it locally.
For more information refer to CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual, chapter 11, Installation
Planning.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(1)
Connect the mains cable.
(2)
Make a direct network connection

between digitizer and NX.
Power Supply Input
Network
Connector
517501ad.cdr
Figure 3
(3)
Fasten the mains cable and

network cable at the corresponding
cable holder.
5175_C01_001.ai
Figure 4
Observe the following safety note if the NX Workstation is delivered as a laptop.

CAUTION:
The accumulated heat developed by the digitizer and the laptop may affect the
operation of the system.
Do not place the laptop on top of the digitizer.
NOTE:
Due to the workflow of the system it is recommended to install digitizer and
NX workstation close together.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
2.2
Switching on the Digitizer and NX Workstation

(1)
Switch on the NX Workstation.
(2)
Switch on the digitizer.
ON
5175_C01_002.ai
Figure 5
NOTE:
blue
After switch on a selftest is executed.
green or
red
Status indicator
Erase button
For explanation of the status indicator

colors see table below.
5175_C01_003.ai
Figure 6
Status Indicator
Digitizer Status
Meaning
Blue
Constant
Activating the erasure cycle.
ON if erasure cycle active.
Constant
Stand-by mode (READY)
ON if:
Ready / Stand-by
Cassette is ready for removal.
Green
Red
Flashing
Busy with scanning and

transporting cassette and
image plate.
ON during scan cycle active.
Constant
Service Mode or Service

Required
ON in case of Service Mode or

Service Required.
Flashing
Warm up / Self-test
Processing
Check NX workstation for

further information and detailed
instructions.
Software down
Error resolvable by User.
Error

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
2.3
Installation of the Error Viewer on NX Workstation

NOTE:
Check whether the error viewer is already installed on the
NX workstation. It can be recognized by a small icon in the
taskbar.
2.4
If yes: Refer to the next section 2.4, Configuring the

NX with default settings
Figure 7
If no: Perform the following installation steps of the

error viewer
(1)
Copy the file \ErrorViewer\ErrorViewerInstaller.msi from USB Stick

to the NX workstation (e.g. D:\ USB Flash Drive)
(2)
Execute the msi file.
(3)
Follow the installation instructions on the screen.
Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings

(1)
On the NX Workstation configure the

IP address "192.192.192.193" and
subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Go to: Control panel
Network connections
For detailed instructions refer to
chapter 4 of the NX Workstation
Service Manual.
Figure 8
NOTE:
The default IP address of the digitizer ex factory is "192.192.192.192".
The IP address of the connected NX Workstation must differ from this
address within the last three digits.
07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(2)
On the NX Workstation configure

computer name "DefaultNX"
Go to: Control panel System
Computer name
Figure 9
NOTE:
For details to the following steps refer to the latest NX Workstation service
documentation. Refer to Service Manual in Agfa HealthCare Library:
(3)
Copy the application license file (ALF) to the directory as described in the
NX workstation manual.
(4)
Enable the ALF-file with the License Manager.
(5)
Start NX Activation Utility.
(6)
During the "Activation process"

change the Available Dose Types
from <LGM> to <EI>.
(7)
Select <None> as "Available Twain

Digitizer" and follow the
instructions on the screen.
(8)
Start the NX Configuration Tool.

Figure 10
(9)
Go to: <General Settings Workstation Settings>

For details refer to the latest NX Workstation service documentation in
Agfa HealthCare Library: <Computed Radiography CR Workstation
Software>

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(10) Enter following settings in the NX Configuration Tool Menu:

<General Settings Workstation Settings>
Parameter
Value
ID station name
DefaultNX
Performed Station AE Title
NX_DEFAULTNX
Processing station name
NX
Port
104
Default Modality
CR
Fast Preview Settings - AE Title
FAST_DEFAULTNX
Enable Fast-ID
Checkbox must be activated
Fast ID AE Title
FASTID_DEFAULTNX
NOTE:
In the NX Configuration Tool the IP address and Subnet mask are not editable.
Make sure that the correct IP address and Subnet mask are indicated as configured
in step (1) of this section.
(11) Go to <Devices Digitizer Configuration> in the NX Config Tool.
(12) Select: <New>
(13) Enter following data in the "Add Digitizer" window:
Name: DEFAULT_DIG
Type: CR 30-X DICOM
Figure 11

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(14) Enter following data in the <Device Configuration Digitizer>

window:
#
Parameter
Value
Digitizer name:
DEFAULT_DIG
IP Address
192.192.192.192
AE Title:
DEFAULTDXM*
Default Router
192.192.100.1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Emergency Button 1 - Age Group
17+
Emergency Button 1 - Exam Group
Chest
Emergency Button 1 - Exposure Type
Chest AP
*The AE Title: DEFAULTDXM is only valid for software version CIR1013.

As of Software version CIR1013 enter the AE Title: DEFAULT_DIG.
(15) Activate the configuration.

This will restart the NX Software.
NOTE:
After the reboot of the NX workstation the red blinking LED at the digitizer
changes to green. This indicates a connection to the NX workstation.
2.5
Testing Standalone Installation

(1)
Insert an unexposed cassette in the digitizer.
(2)
Identify the cassette: Scanning starts.
(3)
Check, if the image arrives at the NX Workstation:
If the image arrives at the NX Workstation, the system works and the
installation was successful.
If the image did not arrive at the NX Workstation,

Repeat the steps mentioned in section troubleshoot as described in
CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual, chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
2.6
Filling in Site specific Data

(1)
Make a direct network connection between digitizer and NX workstation.
(2)
Select: <Configuration Site Specific Data>
Figure 12
2.7
(3)
Enter the site specific data.
(4)
Select <OK> to save the data.
Checking Software Version

(1)
Open: <Device Info Main Device Info>
Figure 13
(2)
Check software version.

NOTE:
Make sure that the latest software version is installed.
For more information how to perform a software upgrade refer to
CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual, chapter 3.2, Tools and auxiliary Means.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
2.8
Configuring the Maintenance Indicator (Optional)

NOTE:
Only perform the following steps in case the maintenance indicator needs to be
activated.
(1)
Select: <Preventive Maintenance Maintenance Indicator>
(2)
Active the maintenance indicator (default = Off).

On (checkbox selected) means:
Customer will be reminded daily or when starting the Control PC

to perform about a preventive maintenance via following message:
o
"Maintenance interval will expire within a short time. Please contact

service."
This message appears approximately 12 weeks before the defined
maintenance due date or due cycles (Default: 2 years / 30.000 cycles)
are reached.
"Maintenance interval expired. Please contact service."

This messages appears, when the maintenance due date or
due cycles are expired is counter is reached.
Off means:
(3)
Maintenance indicator is deactivated. The customer will not be reminded

about preventive maintenance.
If required adapt the target values for "Operating hours" and "Cycles" according
to the local terms of service agreement.
Figure 14

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Configuring the Digitizer and the NX Workstation for the

Hospital Network
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
It is required to login to Windows with a Windows administrator account to perform
the following configurations.
(1)
On the NX Workstation configure IP address, subnet mask and computer name

with the provided information of the hospital.
For detailed instructions refer to chapter 4 of the NX Workstation Service Manual.
(2)
Start the NX Configuration Tool.
(3)
Click on <Devices> and choose the digitizer.
(4)
Enter hospital specific data:
IP address
AE title
Default router
Subnet mask
(5)
Insert USB Memory Stick (part of delivery) into USB Port of the NX Workstation.
(6)
Click on <Create CPF> and save the file on the USB Memory Stick root folder.
(7)
Release the USB Memory Stick from the NX Workstation.
Figure 15
07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(8)
Press both buttons at the feed

table (A).
(9)
Pull out the cassette unit (B).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 16
(10) Plug the USB stick into the

USB slot of the digitizer;
see Figure 17.
(11) Close the cassette unit.
5175_c35_094a.cdr
Figure 17
(12) On NX workstation start the Internet Explorer.

(13) Enter the IP address 192.192.192.192 in the address window and press enter.
The digitizer service user interface opens.
(14) Enter username and password.
(15) Select: <Configuration Digitizer Settings>
(16) Select <Remove Destinations> to delete the default destination
network settings.
(17) Select: <Load Data from USB Stick>
The LED at the USB stick indicates read/write activity.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(18) Unplug the USB stick when the LED at the USB stick is off for a few seconds.
Figure 18
(19) Configure the following basic settings:
Data and Time
User Interface Language

NOTE:
The digitizer displays its user messages in the configured language
at the NX workstation.
(20) Select: <OK>

(21) Remove the Service Key.
(22) Close the Cassette Unit.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Completion of Installation
The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required to prepare the
digitizer for hand-over to the clinical application specialist.
#
Task
Section
Checking the technical image quality of the digitizer.
4.1
Performing a backup.
4.2
Handing-over the system to the Clinical Application

Specialist.
4.3
REQUIRED TIME:
4.1
Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System
4.1.1
Checking the Image Plate before Exposure

(1)
Select the largest available cassette.

If the largest available cassette is a Full Leg / Full Spine (FLFS) Cassette,
use this cassette.
Genrad Cassette
FLFS Cassette
FLFS
FLFS
Figure 19

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(2)
Open the cassette with the

dedicated key or a pen.
517509ag.cdr
Figure 20
(3)
Open the shutter.
(4)
Turn the cassette around, so that

the black tube side is above.
(5)
Let the black tray and image plate

slide out carefully onto the table.
1
2
517509ad.cdr
Figure 21
(6)
Put the black tray with the image

plate onto the cassette.
(7)
Check the image plate for any

contaminations or signs of damage
(e.g. dust particles, scratches).
Figure 22
(8)
If the image plate is contaminated clean it with the CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner
and a soft lint-free cloth.
If the image plate is damaged take another cassette and inform the customer.
IMPORTANT:
Do not put the CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner directly on the image plate.
Always put the CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner on the lint-free cloth.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(9)
Wait approximately 10 minutes until the surface is dry.
(10) Verify that the white phosphor side

is oriented to the black tube side
of the cassette.
(11) Put the image plate back into the
cassette so that the shutter does
not scratch over the image plate.
White phosphor side
Black tube side of the cassette

517509af.cdr
Figure 23
(12) Insert the key or a pen into the cassette.

(13) Close the shutter
(14) Remove the key.
4.1.2
Erasing the Cassette

(1)
Press the Erase button.

The Digitizer switches to erase
mode. The status indicator is
continuously lighting up in blue.
5175_c01_006.ai
Figure 24

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(2)
Put the cassette in the digitizer:

Erasing starts.
5175_c01_005.ai
Figure 25
(3)
4.1.3
Remove the cassette with the erased image plate from the cassette output.
Creating the Flatfield Test Image

(1)
Mount the 1.5 mm Cu filter at the modality.
(2)
Place the cassette in length

direction to the X-ray tube as
shown in Figure 25.
X-Ray tube
Anode
Axys
The black side of the cassette

must show towards the tube.
Black Side
of Cassette
NOT OK
OK
517509aa.cdr
Figure 26
(3)
Ensure that the entire image plate

is fully exposed. The collimated
field must be larger than the image
plate.
Exposed area
NOT OK
OK
517509ac.cdr
Figure 27
07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
(4)
4.1.4
Select the following parameters to obtain a dose of 10 Gy:
12 mAs
75 kVp
1.3 m (51,2) distance
large focus
(5)
Expose the cassette.
(6)
Turn the cassette 180.
(7)
Expose the cassette again.

After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed in total with a dose
of approximately 20 Gy.
(8)
Remove the Cu-filter from the X-ray device.
Scanning the Flatfield Image

(1)
Insert the exposed cassette in the digitizer.
(2)
At the NX workstation select the examination type:

<System Diagnosis Flatfield>
(3)
Identify the cassette.
(4)
Wait till the digitizer has finished scan process.
(5)
Print the image or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).
IMPORTANT:
By selection of examination type <System Diagnosis Flatfield>,
the correct settings for image processing of the flatfield are used.
Any other examination type may give a result which cannot be compared with
the limit pattern.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
4.1.5
Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station

NOTE:
Checking the images and comparing to the limit patterns may only happen on
lightboxes and viewing stations that comply with the specified installation and
configuration conditions for diagnostic reading. For details please refer to the
respective instructions of the viewing stations / light boxes.
NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always parallel to the short side of the image plate
(except 35 x 35 cm cassettes). Due to the hanging protocol* the appearance of the
saved flatfield might differ from the physical orientation of the cassette as it has
entered the digitizer.
* The hanging protocol (DICOM expression) defines the format and presentation how the images are
displayed on the monitor.
43 cm
30 cm
30 cm
24 cm
Slow scan 35 cm
direction
24 cm
15 cm
18 cm
517509ab.cdr
Figure 28
(1)
Check the image quality of the flatfield for the following artifacts:
Stripes in fast scan or slow scan direction
Large area inhomogeneities
Unacceptable number of white dots.
Evaluation:
(1)
If the scanned flatfield does not show one of the artifacts, no further action
is required.
(2)
If the scanned flatfield shows one of the artifacts compare the flatfield with the
limit pattern. For detailed instructions refer to chapter 3.2, Tools and auxiliary
Means.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
IMPORTANT:
If a FLFS cassette for flatfield exposure is used, the image will be slightly darker
in the upper and lower image area where the backscatter protection is removed
(approximately 1 cm each). These darker zones also have to be used for image
quality evaluation in slow scan and fast scan direction.
Flatfield with Genrad Cassette
Flatfield with FLFS Cassette
Effect exaggerated
Genrad Cassette
FLFS Cassette
Backscatter
Protection
FLFS
10 mm
10 mm
FLFS
Figure 29

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
4.2
4.3
Performing a Backup
(1)
In service menu <Backup>

select: <Complete backup>
and <SAVE TO USB>
(2)
Unplug the USB stick when

the message is displayed:
Remove USB stick
(3)
Put the USB stick back in its

cover and mount the screw.
(4)
Mount the top cover.
(5)
Close the cassette unit.
Figure 30
Hand-over of the System to the Clinical Application Specialist

(1)
Inform the Clinical Application Specialist about:
Completion of technical installation
Any irregularities during the installation
The required activities as described in following table
Activity
Section
Setup connectivity to additional system components

(RIS, PACS, Hardcopy, etc.).
4.3.1
Customize system components according to customer

preferences.
4.3.2
Train the customer.
4.3.3
Perform further activities depending on local regulations.
4.3.4
NOTE:
To get access to the Agfa HealthCare Library or to get a copy of the required
documents contact your local service manager.
External partners: Contact your local Agfa representative.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
4.3.1
Setup of Connectivity to additional System Components

(1)
Use the corresponding connectivity release documents for setup of additional

system components, see Agfa HealthCare Library path*:
<General Info Connectivity & Application>
* External partners: Contact your local Agfa representative.
(2)
4.3.2
Setup the connectivity to the additional system components as described in

the connectivity release documents.
Customizing System Components according to Customer Preferences

For instructions how to customize the system components refer to the corresponding
connectivity document and service manual of the system component.
4.3.3
Customer Training
(1)
Hand-over the user manuals. The user manuals are also available on the
Agfa HealthCare Library.
User Manual
CR 30-X 2nd User Manual
CR 30-X Plates and Cassettes

User Manual
Reference to digital Version

on Agfa HealthCare Library:
Computed Radiography CR
Digitizer CR 30-X 2nd
NOTE:
To get access to the Agfa HealthCare Library or to get a copy of the required
documents contact your local service manager.
External partners: Contact your local Agfa representative.
(2)
Train the customer in following activities:
Operating the digitizer, see section 4.3.3.1.
Usage of plates and cassettes, see section 4.3.3.2.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
4.3.3.1
Training for Operating the Digitizer

Following items have to be part of the training for digitizer operation:
The user interface (Status indicator / status messages at NX workstation)
Switching on/off/reset the digitizer
Power and network connector
Boot-up procedure
Basic workflow
Erasing image plates
Retrieving Information about the digitizer
Troubleshooting and errors during operation
NOTE:
For more information refer to the CR 30-X 2nd User Manual.
For NX workstation specific training refer to the NX workstation user documentation.
4.3.3.2
Training for Usage of Plates and Cassettes

Following items have to be part of the training for usage of plates and cassettes:
Labels and functional elements of the cassettes
How to detect Full Leg / Full Spine Cassettes (if available on site)
First use and normal operation
Storage and transport
Operating conditions
Cleaning
NOTE:
For more information refer to the CR Plates and Cassettes User Manual.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
4.3.4
Performing further Activities depending on local Regulations

Enclosed a list of possible activities depending on local regulations:
This list is just an example.
Activity
Reference
Electrical check
IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation on

the Agfa HealthCare Library (Extranet Link /
Intranet Link)
Acceptance Test
Example for Germany: DIN6868
(1)
Contact your local service manager concerning the activities which are required
due to local regulations.

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Installation Checklist
#
Step
Reference
Okay
Task
code*
Installation Prerequisites
1.
Check installation site prerequisites.
1.1
PRI**
2.
Prepare the required tools.
1.2
PRI
3.
Unpack digitizer.
1.3
INS***
4.
Check shipment completeness.
1.4
INS
Connecting the Digitizer to the NX Workstation

5.
Connect cables.
2.1
INS
6.
2.2
INS
7.
Configure the NX workstation with default

settings.
2.3
INS
8.
Install the Error Viewer on NX Workstation
2.4
INS
9.
Test the standalone installation.
2.5
INS
10. Fill in site specific data.
2.6
INS
11. Check software version.
2.7
INS
12. Configure the Maintenance Indicator (Optional)
2.8
INS
Configuring the Digitizer and the NX Workstation for the Hospital Network
Configure the digitizer and NX workstation for
the hospital network.
INS
14. Check technical image quality of the digitizer.
4.1
INS
15. Perform a backup.
4.2
INS
4.3
INS
13.
Completion of Installation
16.
Hand-over the system to the Clinical

Application Specialist.
* Task Code, only applicable for Agfa employees

** PRI = Pre-Installation
*** Ins = Installation task
07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Step
Reference
Okay
Task
code*
Further activities:
17.
Setup connectivity to additional system

components (RIS, PACS, Hardcopy, etc).
4.3.1
ASC
18.
Customize system components according to

customer preferences.
4.3.2
ASC
4.3.3
ATR***
4.3.4
ABA****
19. Train the customer.

20.
Perform for further activities depending on

local regulations.
*
Task Code, only applicable for Agfa employees
** ASC = Configuration & Customization
*** ATR = Customer training
***** ABA = Acceptance Testing

07-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 2
Imaging Services
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225

This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual
assemblies under normal conditions.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial version
Document
Title
Not applicable


eq_02_functional_e_template_v07
DD+DIS230.10E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

(see Agfa HealthCare Library => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or
maintenance task on the equipment.
(2)
the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 2
DD+DIS230.10E
LIST OF CONTENTS
THE CR 30-X SYSTEM IN A NUTSHELL ................................................................................4

1.1
System Overview ......................................................................................................................4
1.2
Intended Use of the Digitizer.....................................................................................................4
1.3
Applications...............................................................................................................................4
1.4
Main Components of the Digitizer.............................................................................................5
1.5
Main Functions of the NX Workstation .....................................................................................6
1.6
Main Components of the Cassette with Image Plate................................................................7
WORKFLOW OF THE CR 30-X 2ND SYSTEM .......................................................................8
HARDWARE COMPONENTS OF THE DIGITIZER .................................................................9
BOOT-UP OF THE DIGITIZER ..............................................................................................11
DESCRIPTION OF THE IP RUN............................................................................................12

5.1
Stall Detection in a Nutshell ....................................................................................................17
5.2
Calibration Board Functions in a Nutshell...............................................................................18
5.3
Drawer Unit Functions in a Nutshell .......................................................................................19

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 3
DD+DIS230.10E
The CR 30-X System in a Nutshell
1.1
System Overview
The digitizer is part of the CR 30-X 2nd
system, comprising:
Digitizer
NX Workstation
Cassette(s) with image plate(s)
Digitizer
Cassette
517500ab.cdr
NX Workstation
Figure 1
1.2
Intended Use of the Digitizer

This device must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an
erasable image plate (IP). The digitizer is part of a system, consisting of X-ray
cassettes with erasable phosphor image plates and a workstation where the Xray
cassettes are identified and the resulting digital image information is further processed
and routed. It is intended that this device is only operated in a radiological environment
by qualified staff.
1.3
Applications
The digitizer is suited for following applications:
Mainstream Genrad including Full Leg / Full Spine, Emergency, Intensive care unit
(ICU), Military field hospitals, Veterinary
Not supported Applications:
Mammography, high quality extremities requiring 50 m resolution (Rheumatology),
Low Dose Pediatrics

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 4
DD+DIS230.10E
1.4
Main Components of the Digitizer

The digitizer consists of following main components:
#
Component Name
Purpose
Cassette Unit
Clamps, opens and closes the cassette.

Reads the information which is stored on the cassette
RF Tag via chip reader.
Writes the status erased on the cassette RF tag via
chip reader after erasure.
Transport Unit including Transports the Image Plate from cassette to slow scan
Erasure Unit
unit and back.
Erases the image plate while it is driven back.
Slow Scan Unit
Driving the image plate continuously during scanning.
Optic Module
Creates a continuous, pivoting laser beam. This beam

stimulates the Image Plate to emit blue light.
Light Collector with

PMT
Collects the blue emitted light, transfers it to the tube of

the photomultiplier and converts the emitted light into
an electrical signal.
CPMI Board
Is the CPU of the digitizer. Serves as the network

interface to the NX workstation.
Handling Control Board Controls the image plate (IP) run.
CR 30-X 2nd Photo Multiplier Interface

(CPMI) Board
Photo Multiplier Tube

(PMT)
Optic Module
Handling Control
Board
Light
Collector
Polygon Mirror
Cassette
Unit
Laser Diode
Slow Scan
Unit
IP Run
Chip
Reader
517502ba.cdr
Transport
Unit
Erasure
Unit
Calibration
Board
Figure 2

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 5
DD+DIS230.10E
1.5
Main Functions of the NX Workstation

The NX Workstation is the central element of a CR (Computed radiography) system.
The NX Workstation is a standalone CR workstation. It is used for:
Acquiring images from the digitizer

Selecting patients from a worklist provided by a RIS (Radiologic Information
System) and writing patient and examination data on the cassette RF tag during
Identification.
Performing automatic Musica (Multiscale Image Contrast Amplification) Image
Processing based on predefined, examination based parameters
Modifying the image quality of acquired images
Performing quality control of the images of the X-Ray department
Transferring images for diagnosis to a hardcopy printer or softcopy station and
to a PACS (Picture Archiving and Communication System) system for archiving
Burning images on CD ROM
DICOM
Manual Data Transfer
PACS
Cassette
Softcopy
Digitizer
NX Workstation
Hardcopy
X-Ray Modality
CD ROM
517502bd.cdr
Figure 3

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 6
DD+DIS230.10E
1.6
Main Components of the Cassette with Image Plate

The complete cassette consists of:
Cassette
Image Plate "MD4.0" (MD = media definition; 4.0 = version).
Tray
The cassette can be opened via a lock. See part A and D in Figure 4.
A cassette label allows the customer to label the cassette.
The tray is used as carrier to pull out the image plate and put it back into the cassette.
The drawer unit of the digitizer docks at three metal docking elements by three
magnets and pulls out the tray for approximately 3 cm. Five rubber stops keep the
image plate in place when the cassette is closed, see part B in Figure 4.
The rubber stops are mounted on spring loaded arms of the tray: When the tray is
pulled out of the cassette by the drawer, these arms move down to release the image
plate. When the drawer moves the tray back, these spring loaded arms move up, to
keep the tray in place by the mounted rubber stops. This ensures, that the image plate
is pushed back when pushing at the tray.
Each tray has a fixed RF-Tag attached. See part B in Figure 4.
RF Tag and image plate belong together.
The red part of the cassette has a lead layer built in for back scatter protection.
The black side is the tube side. See part C in Figure 4.
The CR 30-X cassettes can only be used in the CR 30-X and CR 30-X 2nd digitizer.
B
Image plate
Cassette
Label
2
1
Tray
2
Lock
1
2
Shutter
C
Shutter
Tube Side
RF-tag
Metal Docking
Elements
2 Rubber Pieces
Locking Bar
Cassette with
red Cover
removed
Lock
517502be.cdr
Figure 4

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 7
DD+DIS230.10E
Workflow of the CR 30-X 2nd System

The following figure shows a workflow of a CR 30-X 2nd system:
1
Take exposure
5
Take the cassette
for the next exposure
Insert the exposed Cassette

in the Digitizer:
The IP* is prepared
for scanning.
3
Go to the NX Workstation
and select the Patient:
The digitizer starts scanning.
4
*IP = Image Plate
Wait until the IP* cycle

is finished (approx. 1 min.)
517502ah.cdr
Figure 5
Step : Take the exposure.

Step : Insert the exposed cassette into the digitizer.
Step : Go to the NX Workstation. Select the patient from the worklist and select the
ID (Identify) button. The IP cycle starts.
Step : Wait till the IP cycle is finished. This takes approximately 1 minute.
The digitizer sends the image data during scanning (i.e. during the
IP cycle) to the processing station.
Step : Take out the cassette for the next examination.
NOTE:
In combination with the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer the NX workstation is used in the
so-called Fast ID (Fast identification) workflow:
Fast ID workflow: No ID tablet is used for identification. The patient data are directly
transferred from the workstation to the digitizer.
Standard ID workflow (used at digitizers with input buffer, e.g. DX-G / DX-M):
An ID tablet is used for identification. The patient data are transferred via ID chip on the
cassette to the digitizer.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 8
DD+DIS230.10E
Hardware Components of the Digitizer

The following figure shows the hardware components of the digitizer.
Digitizer
Photomultiplier
(PMT) E-Label
Gearbox
E-Label
Calibration Board
Photomultiplier
Module (PMM) Board
Optics Board
(Optic Module) E-Label
CPMI Board
User Interface
Board
CAN Bus
Cassette Fixation Unit

E-Label
Roller IP
Sensor Board
Handling Control Board
CF Card
E-Label
RF-Tag
Reader
CPMI Power
Distribution Board
Erasure LED
Control Board
Power Supply (24 V)

517502bc.cdr
Ethernet
Power
Data
(and Power)
NX Workstation
Figure 6
The following table lists the functions of the different components.

#
Component Name
Function
Calibration Board
Keeps a BOL (Begin of Line) and EOL (End of Line) sensor to

trigger the timing for digitizing of the scanned image.
Keeps 18 sensors to determine correction factors for digitizing
of the image.
Cassette Fixation Unit Keeps the E-Label for the Cassette Fixation Unit. The E-Label
E-Label Board
is programmed in production and keeps (amongst other
parameters) the width of this specific Cassette Fixation Unit.
CF Card
Compact Flash (CF) Card with special characteristics (industrial

standard) for the usage in the digitizer.
Keeps the software of the digitizer.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 9
DD+DIS230.10E
Component Name
Function
CPMI Power
Distribution Board
Converts the 24 V input voltage from the power supply to the

appropriate voltage for following consumers:
CPMI Board (CR 30X 2nd Photomultiplier

Interface)
CPMI Board
Photomultiplier incl. PMM Board
Optic Module
Calibration Board
CPU of the digitizer: Loads the operating system from CF card

into the RAM.
Controls scanning.
Converts the analog voltage from the PMM Board into 20 bit
linear and further 16 bit root compressed values.
Erasure LED Control

Board
Controls the LEDS of the Erasure Unit.
Gearbox E-Label
Board
Keeps the E-Label for the Gearbox with motor and scan rollers.
The E-Label is programmed in production and keeps amongst
other parameters the individual factors for the gear box and the
scan roller factor of this specific gearbox.
Handling Control
Board
Controls following functional elements:
All motors
User Interface Board
Roller IP Sensor Board
RF Tag Reader
Optics Board (Optic

Module)
Controls polygon motor and laser diode of the Optic Module.
10
Photomultiplier (PMT) Collects the blue emitted light. Converts the emitted light into
an electrical signal.
Keeps a blue LED to generate a reference signal for sensitivity
correction.
11
Photomultiplier
Module (PMM) Board
Interface board between Photomultiplier Tube (PMT) and CPMI

Board as part of the PMT.
12
Power Supply (24 V)
Supplies 24 V input voltage for the CPMI Power Distribution

Board, Erasure Unit and Handling Control Board.
13
RF-Tag Reader
Reads the cassette RF Tag.

Writes the cassette status after scanning or erasure on the
cassette RF Tag.
14
Roller IP Sensor
Board
Monitors the IP run in the digitizer.
15
Controls the LEDs of the user interface.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 10
DD+DIS230.10E
Boot-up of the Digitizer

The following flowchart illustrates the boot-up of the digitizer:
Approximate
time in
seconds
CR 30-X 2nd Boot-Up

Audible / visible Effects
Digitizer
Switch-On
17
Boot-up of CPMI and

40
Send Self Test

Signal to all SW modules
2
3
Selftest okay?
NO
4
Message
Digitizer start-up
(4198) in Error Viewer
Error message
in Error Viewer.
Boot-up stops
43
IP Clean-up
Cycle
Cassette or IP
found?
YES
Motors
are
audible
Rescue Cycle: Digitizer

tries to solve problem.
NO
64
Warning message
in Error Viewer
LED red blinking
YES
Initialize all Modules:

Set all motors to HOME
Initialization okay?
NO
Error message
in Error Viewer.
Boot-up stops
6
NX Viewer
running?
NO
Wait till the Digitizer

receives "ready for
identification message
YES
65
Digitizer idle
1 to 6 : See comments next page.
LED
green on
YES
517502bb.cdr
Figure 7

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 11
DD+DIS230.10E
Comment
After 1 second the status LED starts red blinking.
During these 33 seconds the digitizer performs following actions:
The internal logging and error messages are loaded.
The data in the E-labels are compared with the E-label data on the disk.
The status LED stays red blinking. No audible actions. No message in the
Error Viewer.
3
Send self test signal to all SW modules means: Check whether all consumers
are connected. Click sounds of motors are audible.
Message Digitizer start-up is displayed in the Error Viewer.

This message is generated by the digitizer and will not be displayed however,
if the error viewer is not started-up yet. This is the case for example if digitizer
and workstation are switched on simultaneously.
During the IP Clean-up cycle motors are audible.
If the NX viewer is not running following message appears in the Error Viewer:
Image processing software is not available. Restart the image processing
software. The check whether the NX is running is repeated each 3 seconds.
Description of the IP Run

This section describes the Image Plate (IP) run of the digitizer for a default scan cycle.
The user inserts the cassette with image
plate (IP) into the digitizer.
The edge detection sensor detects the
cassette. 1
The status LED changes from green to
red blinking.
2
3
The cassette fixing motor (M1) fixes the

cassette. 2
The chip reader reads the RF tag:
Timings are adapted according to the
image plate size. 3
517502za.cdr
Figure 8

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 12
DD+DIS230.10E
The cassette locker motor (M17)*

unlocks the cassette shutter. 4
4
517502zb.cdr
Figure 9
The cassette opener motor (M3) opens

the cassette. 5
Both motors (M17 and M3) detect their

end and home position via Stall
Detection. See also NOTE next page.
517502zc.cdr
Figure 10
The drawer unit motor (M4)* drives the

drawer unit towards the
opened cassette. 6
The drawer docks at the tray with its
magnets.
6
Drawer docks
at the tray
via 3 magnets
517502zd.cdr
*Motor is also controlled via stall detection.

Details see section 5.1.
Figure 11

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 13
DD+DIS230.10E
The cassette locker motor (M17)*

releases the tray.
image plate with tray out of the cassette
approximately 3 cm until it is positioned
between the first roller pair of the
transport unit. 7
517502ze.cdr
Figure 12
The roller clamping motor (M6)* closes

the gap between the upper and lower
rollers.
The transport roller motor (M5) drives the
image plate until it is detected by the
Roller IP sensor. 8
Now the IP run stops and waits until the

user selects the ID button at the NX
workstation.
517502ze.cdr
Figure 13
When the user selects the ID button at

the NX workstation, the transport roller
motor (M5) continues to transfer the
image plate towards the slow scan unit.
The slow scan lift motor (M7) lifts the
upper front roller, while the alignment bar
lifts up to align the image plate before
scanning. 9
The roller clamping motor (M6)* lowers

the lower transport rollers. The transport
roller motor (M5) stops.
*Motor is controlled via stall detection.
517502zf.cdr
Figure 14

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 14
DD+DIS230.10E
The slow scan lift motor (M7) lowers the

upper front roller and lifts the upper rear
roller. With this movement the alignment
bar releases the IP. 10
The slow scan motor (M2) transports the
image plate through the slow scan unit.
The calibration board detects the leading
edge of the image plate: Scanning starts.
The first lines of the preview image are
visible on the NX workstation.
10
See also section 5.2, Calibration Board

Functions in a Nutshell.
517502zg.cdr
Figure 15
Scanning stops when the calibration

board detects the trailing edge of
the IP. 11
Now the direction of the slow scan motor
(M2) changes: The image plate is driven
back.
11
517502zh.cdr
Figure 16
The roller IP sensor detects the image

plate.
The roller clamping motor (M6)* closes
the gap between the upper and lower
rollers.
12
The transport roller motor (M5) drives the

image plate towards the cassette, while
the erasure unit erases the cassette. 12
The power of the LEDs is controlled
depending on the examination (and so
depending on the X-ray dose).
517502zi.cdr
Figure 17


06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 15
DD+DIS230.10E

tray into the cassette.
For details see section 5.3, Drawer Unit
Functions in a Nutshell.
When the end position is reached, the
cassette locker motor (M17)* drives in
end position to fixate the tray with IP. 13
13
The drawer unit motor (M4)* drives in

home position. The magnets get
removed from the tray.
517502zj.cdr
Figure 18
With cassette locking motor (M17)* still in

end position, the cassette opener motor
(M3) closes the cassette shutter. 14
14
The cassette locker motor (M17) drives

in home position: The cassette is locked.
The chip reader writes status erased on
the RF Tag.
The cassette fixing motor (M1)* releases
the cassette.
The status LED changes from red
blinking to green.
The scan cycle is finished.
517502zk.cdr
Figure 19


06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 16
DD+DIS230.10E
5.1
Stall Detection in a Nutshell

Stall detection means: Motor stall (home/end position) detection without the use of
additional sensors. It is made by evaluation of the stepper motor control curve on the
motor controller (Each motor has its own motor controller on the Handling Control
Board).
Advantage compared to home/end position detection via light sensors:
Monitoring of motor run not only in home and end position, but also between home
and end position (except acceleration / deceleration time)
Less sensors and cabling
Functional principle of stall detection:
When the stepper motor is accelerating and decelerating the stall detection is
switched off, as the torque changes to much during this phase.
When the motor reaches a stable speed, e.g. after 200 steps, the stall detection is
active for a number of steps, e.g. 5000 steps: The motor control curve is evaluated
by the motor controller.
When the torque increases and reaches a certain "switch off torque", as the motor
reaches the end position, the motor controller detects the stall position and drives
the motor a certain number of steps (e.g. 50 steps) till it stops.
Rubber stops or similar functional elements at the end position support that the
motor can be driven with relatively high speed towards the end position.
If the torque increases to the "switch-off" torque before the motor is supposed to
reach the stall position, the motor is stopped. The digitizer issues an error
message (e.g. "IP jam").
The motor curves shown below are simplified. In reality the motor speed can be
reduced just before the stall position, or can even be reduced in several steps
before it stops.
Figure 20

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 17
DD+DIS230.10E
5.2
Calibration Board Functions in a Nutshell

The calibration board provides following functions:
Geometric Correction:
To correct irregularities in the optical path, the digitizer measures at each boot-up
the timings of the laser beam between pin diode 1 and 2, 2 and 3 and so on.
As a result a kind of "calibration curve" is created, which influences the frequency
of AD conversion. This corrects non linear movements of the laser beam.
Jitter Correction:
To correct irregularities in the polygon run, the digitizer measures the timings
between the BOL (Begin Of Line) and EOL (End Of Line) signal during each scan.
Synchronization of Polygon, Begin of Scan, Begin of Line and AD Window:
When an IP is inserted the polygon starts up. The BOL/EOL sensors measure the
position of the polygon mirrors (they even detect each single facet).
When the IP arrives for scanning, the sensors of the calibration board detect the IP
edge and generate the BOS (Begin Of Scan) signal.
The BOL signal triggers a timer for switching on the laser beam and the AD
(Analog digital) conversion window. The length of the AD window and "Laser On"
depends on the image plate size.
Laser Diode
6 Facet Polygon
EOL Sensor
Geometric Correction
Sensors (1 to 16)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Calibration Board
BOL Sensor
517502fe.cdr
Figure 21

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 18
DD+DIS230.10E
5.3
Drawer Unit Functions in a Nutshell

The drawer unit has several functional elements for pulling the tray out the cassette
and pushing tray and image plate (IP) back in:
1. Pulling out the tray with IP:
Via three magnets A the drawer docks at the tray and pulls out the
tray with IP.
Slider
B
A
C
A
IP Pusher Fingers
517502fd1.cdr
Figure 22
During scanning the tray stays

connected with the drawer.
517502fd3.cdr
Figure 23
2. Pushing IP and tray back in:
Via IP pusher fingers mounted at the slider the image plate is pushed back in
the tray. The magnets B keep the slider in the home position during this
movement.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 19
DD+DIS230.10E
The rest of the movement back in,

the tray is driven via magnets A
only. Magnets C dock at the lower
transport unit axle. While the drawer
moves forward, the slider moves
backward.
This prevents, that the IP pusher
fingers collide with the cassette.
Slider End
Position
Slider Home
Position 517502fd2.cdr
Figure 24
When the magnets A push back the

tray with IP into the cassette, the
Tray Flap Support is moved upwards
to support the center flap.
This ensures, that the rubber stop of
the center flap keeps the IP on the
tray.
Image Plate
Rubber stop
Tray
Tray Flap Support
517502fd4.cdr
Figure 25

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 2 / 20
Chapter 3.1
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225

This document describes the product specific safety notes of the digitizer.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial Version
Document
Title
DD+DIS229.10E

Chapter 11 - Installation Planning


eq_03-1_safety-repair_e_template_v09
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.1 / Page 2 of 20
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
INTENDED USE .......................................................................................................................4
LABELS IN AND ON THE DEVICE ..........................................................................................4
2.1
Labels in the Front ....................................................................................................................4
2.2
Labels in the Rear .....................................................................................................................5
2.3
Labels inside of the Digitizer .....................................................................................................8
2.3.1
Label on the Frame...................................................................................................................8
2.3.2
Label on the Erasure Unit .........................................................................................................8
2.3.3
Label on the Reflector with Brush .............................................................................................9
2.3.4
Label on the Optic Module ......................................................................................................10
SAFETY NOTES FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................................................................12

3.1
General Safety Notes for all Service Activities .......................................................................12
3.2
Safety Notes for Installation Planning.....................................................................................12
3.3
Safety Notes for Installation ....................................................................................................14
3.4
Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work..............................................15
3.5
Safety Notes for Replacements and Repair Procedures ........................................................16
3.5.1
Safety Notes for Replacement at the Base Frame .................................................................16
3.5.2
Replacements in the Cassette Transport Module...................................................................17
3.5.3
Replacements in the Scanner Module....................................................................................17
3.6
Electrical Check after Power Supply Replacement ................................................................18
3.6.1
Basic Protective Earth Test.....................................................................................................18
3.6.2
Electrical Check according to National Regulations ...............................................................20

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

Intended Use
This device must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an
erasable image plate (IP).
The digitizer is part of a system, consisting of X-ray cassettes with erasable phosphor
image plates and a workstation where the X-ray cassettes are identified and the
resulting digital image information is further processed and routed.
It is intended that this device is only operated in a radiological environment by
qualified staff.
Labels in and on the Device
2.1
Labels in the Front

WARNING:
Risk of hand injuries if cassette edge sensor is activated and hand or finger
is inserted in cassette entry.
Keep fingers / hand away from cassette unit entry when a cassette
is inserted.
Do not activate cassette edge

sensor by hand.
Label
Meaning
Do not put your fingers in the input slot of
the digitizer; they can get hurt when caught
between the cassette and the fixation.
Insert the cassette as described in the basic
workflow of the digitizer workflow sheets.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Label
Repair and Service

Meaning
One sticker on the front cover indicates
the correct cassette positioning when
inserting the cassette.
2.2
Labels in the Rear
Contains Transmitter Module

FCC-ID-Nr. OKY1003925351A02C
Figure 1
Label
Meaning
This label indicates the laser safety
according Code of Federal Regulations,
title 21, Subchapter J.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Label
Repair and Service

Meaning
China RoHS* label EFUP** 50
* Restriction of Hazardous Substances
** Environmental Friendly Use Period
Label
Meaning
The type label shows:
Label
Manufacturer
Type number
Serial number (SN XXXXX)
Input voltage, current and

frequency (100-120 / 220-240 V)
Production date (YYYY-MM)
Production site
(Made in Germany / Peissenberg)
Information about certificates

(CE label etc.)
Meaning
Laser class 1 label:
With covers closed the digitizer is a
Class 1 laser product and not dangerous
to the human eye or skin.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
WARNING:
Risk of electrical shock if supplementary earth connector is disconnected with
one hand and the other hand touches a ground connection (e.g. rear cover of
the digitizer).
First switch off the digitizer and remove the mains cable before you remove the
supplementary earth connector.
Label
Meaning
Equipotential label
Label
Meaning
FCC* label
Contains Transmitter Module

FCC-ID-Nr. HPL5243
* Federal Communications Commission
Label
Meaning
Caution! Remove power plug and FCC* rules.
* Federal Communications Commission

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.3
Labels inside of the Digitizer
2.3.1
Label on the Frame

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device may lead to electric shocks.
Make sure, that the grounding connection to the digitizer frame is present.
Label
Meaning
Ground Connection
2.3.2
Label on the Erasure Unit

WARNING:
The erasure unit is hot - up to 200 C:
Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.
Label
Meaning
Warning label: Hot area

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

CAUTION:
Finger prints on the mirror may cause reduced image quality.
Be careful not to touch the mirror.
Label: Erasure Unit: Bottom side
Meaning
Caution label:
Do not touch optical surface
Label: Erasure Unit: Upper side
Meaning
Caution label:
2.3.3
Label on the Reflector with Brush

CAUTION:
Label
Meaning
Caution label:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.3.4
Label on the Optic Module

WARNING:
120 mW Laser (Class 3B) in the OPTIC MODULE may cause eye injuries.
Avoid direct and indirect eye contact.
Do not keep tools in the laser beam when the device is switched on or the
CASSETTE UNIT OPEN SAFETY SWITCH is overridden with a service key:
Risk of reflection.
Do not open the cover of the OPTIC MODULE.
AGFA
OEM Product
Agfa
Agfa
OPTICS CENTER
DO NOT OPEN
No service / maintenance
parts inside
for system integration only
Agfa
Agfa
A G FA
OPTICS CENTER
AG
F
OP
TIC A Agf
Agf
S CEN aa
TER
No DO NOT
serv
OPE
partice /
N
s insimainten
de
anc
DO NOT OPEN
OP
TIK
F8. BAU
517 GRU
AG
FA
M-N 5.27 PPE
50.X
GE
Dat r.
V AE e XXX
MM XX
RT
/JJJ
N.
J
OEM
V. Mad
sys Produc
e in
tem
Ger
t
inte
man
gra
y
tion
onl
y
parts inside
for
OPTIKBAUGRUPPE
F8.5175.2750.X
M-Nr. XXXXX
Date MM/JJJJ
AGFA GEVAERT N.V. Made in Germany
5175_c31_002.ai
Figure 2
Label
Meaning
Type Label: Optics assembly with:
Module Serial number

(M-Nr. XXXXX)
Date of production (MM/JJJJ)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

Label
Meaning
Danger label:
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
Label
Meaning
Caution label: 3B Laser
Label
Meaning
OEM* product label
OEM Product
for system integration only
Label
* OEM = Original Equipment Manufacturer
Meaning
parts inside
Warning label:
Do not open!

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Safety Notes for Service Activities
3.1
General Safety Notes for all Service Activities

CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the digitizer: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
CAUTION:
Risk of injuries if the cassette unit
open safety switch is overridden
with a service key.
In this case keep your hands and
garment away from the digitizer.
Safety Switch (S2)
Figure 3
3.2
Safety Notes for Installation Planning

Warning:
standby generator.
WARNING:
Use proper shoe and hand protection when lifting the digitizer.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
WARNING:
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in
different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can
cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power

Source (UPS) as the PC.
WARNING:
WARNING:
The structure and stability of the used table need to be suitable in relation with the size
and weight of the system. The table may not be subject to excessive shock and
WARNING:
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this
way, that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
CAUTION:
Reduced airflow may lead to pollution in the digitizer.
Keep a minimum of 5 cm (2 inches) between rear side of the digitizer and the wall.
At least 50 cm [19.7 in] space has to be provided on the right hand side to allow
cleaning of the scan line with the cleaning brush. This can be performed by the
customer.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
3.3
Safety Notes for Installation

WARNING:
WARNING:
The structure and stability of the used table need to be suitable in relation with the
size and weight of the system. The table may not be subject to excessive shock and
For more information refer to the CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual, Installation Planning
document DD+DIS229.10E; see Agfa HealthCare Library:
<Computed Radiography CR Digitizers CR 30-X 2nd
Service Manual>
CAUTION:
The accumulated heat developed by the digitizer and the laptop may affect the
operation of the system.
Do not place the laptop on top of the digitizer.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
3.4
Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work

WARNING:
During operation the erasure unit is hot: Risk of burns.
200
CAUTION:
Parts underneath the top cover can be damaged.
Carefully remove the top cover.
CAUTION:
IP jams possible if IP guide plate is deformed.
Do not bend IP guide plate at removal.
CAUTION:
Sensitive surface. Reduced image quality possible due to clouded reflector.
Do not touch the reflector of the erasure unit by hand.
Do not use cleaning agents to clean the reflector.
Only use a lint-free cloth for cleaning.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
3.5
Safety Notes for Replacements and Repair Procedures
3.5.1
Safety Notes for Replacement at the Base Frame

DANGER:
If the power cord is connected and the main switch is switched on the input side
of the power supply is connected to high voltage. Risk of live.
Remove all cables in the rear of the digitizer before opening the rear cover.
DANGER:
green/yellow
black
If the cables at the input side of the

power supply are mounted wrong,
the housing of the digitizer can be
connected to high voltage. Risk of
live.
Mount the cables at the power supply
input as indicated on the cables and
shown in Figure 4.
green/yellow
black
5175_c35_015.cdr
Figure 4
WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead
to electric shocks.
After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains
voltage inform the responsible organization about the necessity of the electrical
test according to national regulations.
CAUTION:
Carefully remove the top cover. Follow the instructions as shown in next step.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
CAUTION:
If the cables at the output side at the
top of the power supply are
mounted wrong, all printed circuit
black
boards will be defective after
switch-on.
red
Mount the cables as shown in

Figure 5.
5175_c35_017a.cdr
Figure 5
3.5.2
Replacements in the Cassette Transport Module

CAUTION:
3.5.3
Replacements in the Scanner Module

CAUTION:
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
3.6
Electrical Check after Power Supply Replacement

WARNING:
Improper ground connection of the digitizer metal housing may lead
to electric shocks.
voltage inform the operator about the necessity of the electrical check according
to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist it is recommend to perform the

electrical check according to IEC 62353.
The electrical check is split up in two steps:

Step
3.6.1
Task
Section
Perform basic protective earth test.
3.6.1
Perform electrical check according to

National Regulations.
3.6.2
Basic Protective Earth Test

(1)
Use a multimeter that is capable to measure a resistance < 1 Ohm.
(2)
Measure the resistance of the

multimeter configuration, i.e. select
smallest range of resistance
measurement and measure the
resistance of your probes.
(3)
Disconnected the power cable

at the wall side and at the device.
Figure 6

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Basic protective earth test without power cord

(1)
Put one probe at the ground

connector of the mains input.
(2)
Put the other probe at a few

metallic parts, the customer could
touch. The electrical resistance
has to be 0.2 Ohm. Refer to
Figure 7.
Figure 7
Basic protective earth test with power cord

(1)
Insert the power cord at the

digitizer side; leave it disconnected
at the wall side.
(2)
Put one probe at the ground

connector of the mains connector.
(3)
Put the other probe at a few

metallic parts, the customer could
touch. The electrical resistance in
this case has to be 0.3 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 8.
Figure 8
IMPORTANT:
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits (0.2 Ohm
without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable) check the digitizer for loose grounding
connections!

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
3.6.2
Electrical Check according to National Regulations

(1)
Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.
IMPORTANT:
It is recommended performing an electrical check according to IEC 62353.
According to National Regulations a partial acceptance is necessary.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.2
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225

This document describes all tools (software, hardware), which are required for
servicing of the digitizer.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial Version
Document
Title
DD+DIS230.10E

Chapter 2 - Functional Description
DD+DIS230.10E

Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibrations


eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v08
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
MACHINE SPECIFIC TOOLS ..................................................................................................5

1.1
Required Tools..........................................................................................................................5
1.2
Recommended Tools................................................................................................................6
DIGITIZER SERVICE USER INTERFACE...............................................................................7

2.1.1
Service User Interface Menus...................................................................................................8
2.2
Device Info ................................................................................................................................9
2.2.1
Main Device Info .......................................................................................................................9
2.2.2
Network Info ............................................................................................................................10
2.2.3
Info Counter ............................................................................................................................11
2.2.4
E-Labels ..................................................................................................................................13
2.3
Reporting.................................................................................................................................14
2.3.1
Service Activity Log.................................................................................................................14
2.3.2
Error Statistics.........................................................................................................................15
2.3.3
HOT Report.............................................................................................................................16
2.4
Modification .............................................................................................................................17
2.4.1
Software Installation................................................................................................................17
2.5
Analysis and Repair ................................................................................................................18
2.5.1
Explain Error Code..................................................................................................................18
2.5.2
Diagnose Cycle .......................................................................................................................19
2.5.3
Selftest of Device ....................................................................................................................21
2.5.4
Endurance Run Cycle .............................................................................................................22
2.5.5
Clear Relative Counters..........................................................................................................23
2.5.6
Prepare CAL. Board Replacement .........................................................................................24
2.6
Preventive Maintenance .........................................................................................................25
2.6.1
Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................25
2.6.2
Stall Calibration .......................................................................................................................26
2.6.3
Maintenance Indicator.............................................................................................................27
2.7
Configuration...........................................................................................................................29

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

2.7.1
Site Specific Data....................................................................................................................29
2.7.2
Digitizer Settings .....................................................................................................................30
2.7.3
Switch On/Off HV on PMM .....................................................................................................31
2.7.4
Protection Mechanism ............................................................................................................32
2.8
Backup / Restore ....................................................................................................................34
2.8.1
Backup ....................................................................................................................................34
2.8.2
Restore....................................................................................................................................36
REMOTE DESKTOP ..............................................................................................................37

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Machine specific Tools

The listing of machine specific tools is divided in required tools and
recommended tools:
1.1
Required tools: They are required for installation, repair or troubleshooting
Recommended tools: They may facilitate installation, repair or troubleshooting
Required Tools
TX 20

Lint free cloth
Commercially available, Acquire locally
Flash light
Cutter
Multimeter (Ohmmeter)
200

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
1.2
Recommended Tools
Tool
Part Number*
Purpose
Service key
CM+9 0426 6309 0
To override the safety

switch.
Network Cable
Commercially available,
Acquire locally
Transfer data between the

digitizer and the Service PC
in case that web interface is
used.
Copper Filter 1.5 mm
CM+9 5155 1015 2
Exposure of test images:

Part of delivery of the
CR 30-X 2nd
CM+9 5175 9160 0
Limit pattern:
CR 30-X 2nd
USB Stick with Digitizer

Software (checked to be
virus-free)
CM+6027410
Transfer data between the

Service PC and digitizer.
CR 30-X 2nd
Anti-static wrist strap
CM+9 9999 0830 0
To avoid static discharges

on electronic components.
CR Phosphor Plate
Cleaner (2 bottles)
10+9 9999 1197 0
To clean the Image Plates.
Vacuum Cleaner
(220 / 240V, 50 60 Hz)
Commercially available or To clean the digitizer during

CM+9 9999 0895 0
maintenance.
Isoflex Topas NB52 (50 ml) CM+9 9999 9247 0
To grease the spindle in

the area of the spindle nut.
Dirt bags for vacuum

cleaner (10 x)
CM+9 9999 0896 0
To clean the digitizer during

maintenance. Fits to
Vacuum Cleaner
CM+9 9999 0895 0
Lint free cloth
Commercially available,
Acquire locally
To clean the Image Plates.
Magnifying glass 8x
CM+9 9579 9904 0
To check image quality of

films at the lightbox.
Service PC
Commercially available
To copy the digitizer

software from the PC
to the USB stick.
To get an explanation about
error codes "offline".
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Digitizer Service User Interface

The Service User Interface provides access to the service software for the digitizer.
It requires:
A network connection between PC and digitizer
A Browser e.g. Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox
Proceeding to access the Service User Interface:

(1)
Enter the digitizer IP address (e.g. 192.168.192.12) in the browser

address window.
(2)
Enter username and password, which is provided during the class room training.
Proceeding to quit the Service User Interface:

(1)
Select: <Logout>
(2)
Follow the Logout wizard.
(3)
Close the browser window.
Figure 1: CR30-X 2nd Service User Interface

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.1.1
Service User Interface Menus

Following menus are available in the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer service user interface:
Menu
See Section
Device Info
Main Device Info
2.2.1
Network Info
2.2.2
Info Counter
2.2.3
E-Labels
2.2.4
Reporting
Service Activity Log
2.3.1
Error Statistics
2.3.2
HOT Report
2.3.3
Modification
Software Installation
2.4.1
Analysis & Repair

Explain Error Code
2.5.1
Diagnose Cycle
2.5.2
Selftest of Device
2.5.3
Endurance Run Cycle
2.5.4
Clear Relative Counters
2.5.5
Prepare CAL. Board Replacement
2.5.6
Preventive Maintenance
Shading Calibration
2.6.1
Stall Calibration
2.6.2
Maintenance Indicator
2.6.3
Configuration
Site Specific Date
2.7.1
Digitizer Settings
2.7.2
Switch on/off HV on PMM
2.7.3
Protection Mechanism
2.7.4
Backup / Restore
Backup
2.8.1
Restore
2.8.2

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.2
Device Info
2.2.1
Main Device Info
Purpose
Usage
Show the device specific data configured in production.

(1)
Select: <Device Info Main Device Info>

Device specific data will be displayed.
NOTE:
The Device specific Data are read-only and just for identification
of the device.
Figure 2

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.2.2
Network Info
Purpose
Usage
Show the network settings of the digitizer and the hospital network with
connected devices.
(1)
Select: <Device Info Network Info>

Network Info will be displayed.
(2)
Select <Ping Destination> to check the network connection to other devices

in the network.
NOTE:
Only this destination can be selected, which has been set-up in the
Digitizer Settings window.
The ping test tries to send data to the selected destination in the network
to verify an established connection.
Figure 3

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.2.3
Info Counter
Purpose
The Info Counter provides device specific information on following items:
Main Info Counter Section
Info Counter Details
Site and System Info
Device info
Site info
Hardware info
Software info
Configuration info
Network info
License info
Machine running time
Throughput
Reliability
Cycles between Failure
Repair History
Maintenance History
HW Modification History
SW Modification History
Calibration History
HW Replacement History
Remote Maintenance History
Cassette Formats
Scan Formats
Test Cycles
Image Plate Types
Polygon
PMT
Laser
Device Statistics
Service Statistics
Technical Counters

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Usage
Main Info Counter Section
Info Counter Details
Failure Statistics
Last Counter Resets
Start-ups and Resets
Retries
Incorrect User Handling
Cassette Jams
Image Plate Jams
Error History
Error List (sorted by relative)
Error List (sorted by total)
Warning List (sorted by total)
(1)
Select: <Device Info Info Counter>
Figure 4

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.2.4
E-Labels
Purpose
Usage
The E-labels keep information about module specific data like:
Module serial number
Last error codes
Module specific parameters
(1)
Select: <Device Info E-Labels>
(2)
Select the desired E-Label to view the contents.
Figure 5

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.3
Reporting
2.3.1
Purpose
Usage
The menu Service Activity Log shows a logfile of all actions carried out by the
service staff.
(1)
Select: <Reporting Service Activity Log>
Figure 6
NOTE:
All ServiceActivity.log files are part of a backup.
When the logfile exceeds 1 MB, a new and empty ServiceActivity.log file
is created.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.3.2
Error Statistics
Purpose
Usage
The menu Error Statistics shows the frequency for all occurred errors.
It is used for troubleshooting.
(1)
Select: <Reporting Error Statistics>

NOTE:
For the explanation of the error codes use the module Explain Error
Code. For more information refer to section 2.5.1.
Figure 7

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.3.3
HOT Report
Purpose
The menu Hot Report (Hand-over Test Report) gives a summary of the last
scan cycle.
The most important events that happened in the digitizer during this cycle are reported
here. When the HOT is performed successfully, the technical installation
(communication and image transmission) is basically working.
It is overwritten with each new scan cycle. Typically it stops with the last successful
action performed, hence it can be used for troubleshooting as well.
Usage
(1)
Select: <Reporting Hot Report>
Figure 8

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.4
Modification
2.4.1
Software Installation
Purpose
The menu Software Installation allows to upload and install software for the digitizer.
IMPORTANT:
For software installation a USB stick (checked to be virus-free) or network connection
is required.
For software installation via USB stick: One USB Memory stick is scope of delivery of
the digitizer. The USB port of the digitizer does not accept all types of USB sticks.
Recommendation: Use the USB Memory Stick delivered with the digitizer.
The USB Stick can also be ordered via spare part number*: CM+6027410
Usage
(1)
Select: <Modification Software Installation>
(2)
Follow the instructions which are enclosed to the software on the

Figure 9
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.5
Analysis and Repair
2.5.1
Explain Error Code
Purpose
Usage
The menu Explain Error Code list the description for the digitizer error codes which
are reported by the error viewer.
(1)
Select: <Analysis & Repair Explain error code>
(2)
Enter the error code and click button: <Get Error Description>
The error description is displayed.
Figure 10

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.5.2
Diagnose Cycle
Purpose
Usage
The menu Diagnose Cycle allows to perform a complete scan cycle manually
step by step e.g. for troubleshooting purpose.
Diagnose Cycle of the complete device:
(1)
Select: <Analysis & Repair Diagnose Cycle>
(2)
Click: <Confirm>
The diagnose cycle window is shown.
(3)
Put a cassette into the digitizer.
(4)
Press the grey marked buttons to perform the required actions.

See also explanation on next page
Figure 11
IMPORTANT:
The Error Viewer and related confirm / cancel window only pops up at the
NX workstation. This means, that in any case entering the diagnose cycle
window needs to be confirmed at the NX workstation.
Only leave the Diagnose Cycle window by the CANCEL button. Leaving it via
browser back button requires a reboot of the digitizer to allow further service
activities.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Figure 12
NOTE:
Description of the colored rectangles shown in the diagnose cycle overview:
A light blue displayed rectangle shows other statuses of the complete

cassette cycle.
A green displayed rectangle shows the current status.
A dark blue displayed rectangle shows the next possible action.
A gray displayed rectangle shows the next possible action.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.5.3
Selftest of Device
Purpose
The menu Selftest of Device allows a reboot of the digitizer via CR 30-X service
user interface. The functional sequence of the selftest is identical to the selftest
during switch-on.
For more information refer to CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual, chapter 2, Functional
Description.
Usage
(1)
Select: <Analysis & Repair Selftest of Device>
(2)
Click: <Start SELFTEST>
(3)
Wait till the digitizer has rebooted. This takes approximately 1 minute.
Figure 13

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.5.4
Endurance Run Cycle
Purpose
The menu Endurance Run Cycle allows to run up to 300 cassette cycles with or
without scanning and erasure:
This can be helpful when investigating sporadic image plate handling failures.
Usage
(1)
Select: <Analysis & Repair Endurance Run Cycle>
(2)
Click: <Confirm>
The endurance run window is shown.
(3)
Put a cassette into the digitizer.
(4)
Select the number of cycles and delay between cycles (if required).
(5)
Select <Scanning> and / or <Erasure> (if required).
(6)
Select: <Start>
Figure 14
IMPORTANT:
NX workstation. This means, that in any case, entering the Endurance Run
window needs to be confirmed at the NX workstation.
Only leave the Endurance Run window by the CANCEL button. Leaving it via
browser back button requires a reboot of the digitizer to allow further service
activities.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.5.5
Clear Relative Counters
Purpose
With the menu Clear Relative Counters the relative counters* of the info counter
are cleared.
* Number of test cycles per format; number of start-ups and resets; Retries; Incorrect User Handling;
Cassette and IP jams; Error List; Warning List
Usage
(1)
Select: <Analysis & Repair Clear Relative Counters>
(2)
Click: <OK>
Figure 15

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.5.6
Prepare CAL. Board Replacement
Purpose
Usage
With the menu Prepare Calibration Board Replacement the Roller lift drive is moved
in a dedicated position to dismantle the Calibration board.
(1)
Select: <Analysis & Repair Prepare CAL. Board replacement>
(2)
Click: <Start>
Figure 16

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.6
Preventive Maintenance
2.6.1
Shading Calibration
Purpose
Usage
The menu Shading Calibration provides functionality to compensate image

inhomogeneities caused by certain properties of the scanning system of the digitizer.
The shading calibration procedure is described in CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual,
chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations.
Figure 17

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.6.2
Stall Calibration
Purpose
Usage
The menu Stall Calibration allows performing a stall calibration for a single motor
or for all motors.
The stall calibration procedure is described in CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual,
chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations.
Be aware, that entering the Stall Calibration window needs to be confirmed in the
error viewer.
Figure 18
IMPORTANT:
NX workstation. This means, that in any case, entering the Stall Calibration window
needs to be confirmed at the NX workstation.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.6.3
Maintenance Indicator
Purpose
Usage
The menu Maintenance Indicator allows:
To reset relative counters after performed maintenance
To activate or deactivate the maintenance notification mechanism.

By default the maintenance notification is disabled.
To change the target values for the Mean Cycle Between Maintenance (MCBM)
and the Mean Time Between Maintenance (MTBM)
To configure whether the screen "Preventive Maintenance required" shall

pop-up in the user interface of the NX workstation if the adjusted number of
cycles or operating hours are over since the last reset of the maintenance
indicator.
(1)
Select: <Preventive Maintenance Maintenance Indicator>
(2)
Select <Reset Maintenance Counter> to reset the time/cycle counter.
(3)
Choose <Yes> in the pull-down menu <Display Maintenance Reminder>

to configure and enable the maintenance reminder.
"Yes" means: The customer will be reminded with "Preventive Maintenance

required" message daily.
"No" means: No display is shown to the customer.
Figure 19: Maintenance Indicator set to No

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(4)
If the Maintenance Indicator is activated: Configure the number of target

operating hours and Cycles.
(5)
Click: <OK>
Figure 20: Maintenance Indicator set to Yes
(6)
Click <CANCEL> to go back to the menu.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.7
Configuration
2.7.1
Site Specific Data
Purpose
Usage
The menu Site Specific Data allows entering the site specific data for exact
identification of the digitizer. The data are part of the Info counter and the E-labels.
(1)
Select: <Configuration Site Specific Data>
(2)
Enter the required data.
(3)
Click: <OK>
Figure 21
(4)
Click <CANCEL> to go back to the menu.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.7.2
Digitizer Settings
Purpose
Usage
The menu Digitizer Settings allows entering data to modify the digitizer network
settings.
The configuration of the digitizer settings is described in CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual,
chapter 1, Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures.
(1)
Select: <Configuration Digitizer Settings>

Digitizer settings of the digitizer will be shown.
Figure 22

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.7.3
Switch On/Off HV on PMM
Purpose
Usage
The menu Switch on/off HV (high voltage) on PMM allows using the device with
open covers. This is necessary for troubleshooting to find possible problems during
scan cycle.
(1)
Select: <Configuration Switch on/off HV on PMM>
(2)
Select <High Voltage on Photomultiplier Module OFF>

to switch the HV off.
IMPORTANT:
Always switch the HV on after investigation.
Figure 23
NOTE:
By a reset of the digitizer (switch off / on) the HV for the PMM board will always
be switched on again.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.7.4
Protection Mechanism
Purpose
Usage
The menu Protection Mechanism allows enabling or disabling the protecting

mechanism for the service menu. By default the protection mechanism is disabled.
(1)
Select: <Configuration Protection Mechanism>
(2)
Enter access code and license code.

IMPORTANT:
When the protection mechanism is not enabled, the service menu
is only protected through standard service password from Agfa.
Figure 24

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
NOTE:
Obtain the access code and license code for the individual device from the Local
Agfa Service Organization:
Access code and license code have an expiration date configured by the
Local Agfa Service Organization.
Once the protection mechanism is activated, enter access code and the code
only (not for the license code any more).
When entered the service menu, you will not be asked for login to the service
menu for the next 16 hours.
If the expiration date is reached, login with the access code one more time only
and get access for the next 16 hours. After that time the device will block itself
asking for new access and license code.
IMPORTANT:
De-activate remember passwords in the browser otherwise the service menu will be
accessible by everyone who uses the service user interface.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.8
Backup / Restore
2.8.1
Backup
Purpose
The menu Backup allows storing device specific settings and other relevant data
(e.g. info counter, logfiles etc.) in a backup Zip file (= Backup).
NOTE:
The device specific data of the digitizer are stored in a database in the CF-card of the
digitizer and in the E-labels of the digitizer.
The internal backup will be executed by the digitizer automatically upon changing
digitizer specific data. This initiates a notification to store the backup manually on
a storage medium.
(1)
Select: <Backup/Restore Backup>
Figure 25

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Usage
Complete
backup
Usage
Backup of
single files
Perform the following steps to create a complete external backup:

(1)
Choose option: <Complete Backup>
(2)
Insert USB Memory Stick into digitizer.
(3)
Click <Save to USB> to perform the complete backup.
(4)
Wait until the read/write activity LED at the USB stick is off for a few seconds.
Perform the following steps to create a backup of single files:

(1)
Choose option: <Backup Single Files Only>
(2)
Select the required files:
Info counter and/or
Calibration Files and/or
Logfiles and/or HOT report and/or
(3)
(4)
Select <Save to USB> to perform the backup.
(5)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.8.2
Restore
Purpose
The menu Restore is required in case the CF-card has been replaced by
a new one.
If the Backup is not restored, the digitizer specific data on the E-lables will be copied
onto the CF-card after next reboot. This ensures functionality of the device,
but the device history records (e.g. infocounter) will be lost.
Usage
(1)
Select: <Configuration Restore>
(2)
(3)
Click: <Restore from USB>
(4)
NOTE:
It is only possible to restore the backup that was created on this device.
Figure 26

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Remote Desktop
Purpose
Usage
Remote connection via the NX workstation to the digitizer.

(1)
Connect the service PC to the network where the NX workstation with digitizer
is located (e.g. via Agfa SRSS).
(2)
On the local PC select the following path: <Start Programs

Accessories Communications Remote Desktop>
(3)
Enter the hostname or IP address of the NX workstation.
Figure 27: Example "Remote Desktop Connection" screen
(4)
Select: <Connect>
(5)
Start the browser.
(6)
Connect to CR 30-X 2nd service user interface on the NX workstation.

For details to the service user interface; see section 2.
NOTE:
The NX workstation is by default enabled for remote desktop.

Enabling for remote desktop is done via function:
<Start Control Panel System Remote>
If the CR 30-X 2nd service user interface is started in a remote session, following
functions are not accessible, as they require presence of a service engineer at
the digitizer:
o
Diagnose Cycle
Endurance run cycle
Stall Calibration

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.3
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225

This document provides troubleshooting information.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial version
Document
Title
Referenced documents are listed in the respective sections.

The controlled version of this document resides on the Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

troubleshooting_chapter_e_template_v01
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS230.10E
Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

(2)
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:
Order List, Checklist for Completeness in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.3 / 2 of 2
Main Title
Sub title
DD+DIS230.10E
LIST OF CONTENTS
FAULTS WITH ERROR CODES ..............................................................................................4
FAULTS WITHOUT ERROR CODES ......................................................................................5
2.1
Status LED stays red blinking after Boot-up .............................................................................5
2.1.1
No Connection between Digitizer and NX Workstation ............................................................5
2.1.2
Digitizer Hardware Fault without Error Code ............................................................................8
IMAGE FAULTS .....................................................................................................................11

3.1
Calibration Lines .....................................................................................................................11
3.2
Banding ...................................................................................................................................12
3.3
Dust Stripes.............................................................................................................................13
USING THE LIMIT PATTERN TO JUDGE IMAGE FLAWS ...................................................14

4.1
Preparation..............................................................................................................................14
4.2
Comparing the Flatfield with the Test Pattern "Lowest Acceptable Quality" ..........................14
4.2.1
Importing Limit Pattern............................................................................................................14
4.2.2
Comparing Limit Pattern with Flat Field..................................................................................15

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS230.10E
Faults with Error Codes
Symptom
The digitizer error viewer on the NX workstation displays an error code.
Cause
The digitizer software detected a malfunction of the digitizer.
Solution
Solve the problem as described in the service description of the error code.
To look-up a digitizer error code (e.g. 4133) proceed as follows:
A) Look-up the error "online" (Access to NX Workstation available):
(1)
On the NX Workstation start the internet browser.
(2)
Enter the IP address of the digitizer in the address window.
(3)
Look-up the error in menu "Explain Error Code".
B) Look-up the error "offline" (No access to NX Workstation):

(1)
Download the latest CR 30-X 2nd Software File from the

(2)
Unzip the CR 30-X 2nd Software File.
(3)
Unzip the CIR_XXXX.zip* file.
(4)
Using Excel, look-up the error in file "errors.csv".

* XXXX represents the software version.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Main Title
Sub title
DD+DIS230.10E
Faults without Error Codes
2.1
Status LED stays red blinking after Boot-up
Symptom
After boot-up the Status LED does not get green.

The NX workstation is running, however no error is displayed in the error viewer.
NOTE:
For a default boot-up sequence refer to the digitizer service manual chapter 2,
Functional Description.
Cause
One or more conditions are not fulfilled to allow scanning of image plates.
Possible causes:
1. Network connection between digitizer and NX workstation cannot be established.
2. Selftest of digitizer Hardware (Board, motors, sensors) is not successful.
3. Image plate in the digitizer which cannot be removed.
4. Digitizer is not properly configured in NX
5. NX application not started up.
Solution
Troubleshoot as described in following sections 2.1.1 and 2.1.2.
2.1.1
No Connection between Digitizer and NX Workstation
Symptom
Status LED is red blinking. More than one minute after switch on the status LED does
not change to green.
Motors have been audible during the boot-up procedure.
No error message in the error viewer. "Digitizer start-up" message is not shown
approximately 40 seconds after switch on.
Cause 1
Network cable not connected or defective.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS230.10E
Solution 1
Check network interface LEDs at NX workstation: They should light up (constant or

intermittently).
Check the orange LED LD1#4 at the CPMI board (see chapter 3.4 of the Service
Manual): It should light up.
If the network LEDs on both sides do not light up, try another network cable.
Network interface defective at NX Workstation or digitizer.
Cause 2
Solution 2
Checking the network interface at the NX workstation:

(1)
Connect the Service PC via network cable to the NX workstation (Service PC

IP address configuration not required).
(2)
Check whether the network LEDs at the NX workstation light up.
If the network LEDs on the NX workstation does not light up, exchange the network
interface at the NX workstation.
Checking the network interface at the digitizer:
(3)
Connect the Service PC via network cable to the digitizer CPMI board (Service
PC IP address configuration not required).
(4)
Check the orange LED LD1#4 at the CPMI board (see chapter 3.4 of the Service
Manual): It should light up.
If the network LED on the digitizer does not light up, exchange the CPMI board.
Cause 3
Wrong configuration settings on digitizer and/or NX Workstation.
Solution 3
Following settings must be correct on the digitizer and the NX Workstation to allow
communication (see table next page):

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Main Title
Sub title
DD+DIS230.10E
Digitizer Setting
Setting on NX (correspondent parameter)
Destination IP Address
NX Workstation IP address (Windows setting)
Destination Name
NX Workstation Computer Name (Windows Setting)
AE title (Image)
NX Workstation Processing station name

(Configuration Tool menu "General Configuration
Configure Workstation settings General Settings")
Digitizer IP Address
IP address in digitizer device configuration. As

alternative also the digitizer host name can be used.
Digitizer AE title
AE title in digitizer device configuration.
Digitizer Hostname
Host Name in digitizer device configuration. As

alternative also the digitizer IP address can be used.
Digitizer Type CR 30-X

Dicom (default cannot
be changed)
Has to be selected when adding a new digitizer with

the NX Configuration Tool. Is later on displayed as
Type in the Device Configuration Settings.
Digitizer IP address or subnet mask configured wrong (e.g. due to a typing error):
Cause 4
Accessing the digitizer service pages is not possible anymore, as the network settings
are unknown.
Solution 4
Reset the IP address to default. Proceeding:

(1)
Download the reset_network_settings_to_default_CR_30_2nd.zip,

Document ID 33612397, from the Agfa Healthcare Library.
(2)
Remove the top cover.
(3)
Take out the USB stick from the USB storage box.
(4)
Insert the USB stick at the Service PC.
(5)
Unzip the file to the USB Stick.
(6)
Release the USB stick and insert it at the digitizer.
(7)
(8)
Wait till the boot-up is finished (approximately 1 minute).
(9)
Remove the USB stick and put it back in the USB storage box.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS230.10E
After bootup of the digitizer with the unzipped

reset_network_settings_to_default_CR_30_2nd.zip the network settings
are as follows:
IP Address:
192.192.192.192
Subner Mask:
255.255.255.0
Gateway IP Address:
192.192.192.1
Digitizer AE Title:
CIRRUS
Digitizer Hostname:
192.192.192.192
Cause 5
NX Application is not running.
Solution 5
Check the NX Workstation Monitor in the task bar: It must be green.
2.1.2
Digitizer Hardware Fault without Error Code

NOTE:
In following cases the digitizer does not show an error at the NX workstation, even if a
hardware defect is present:
If the CPMI board cannot boot-up or
If the network connection is not available.
Symptom
Status LED is red blinking and does not get green approximately 1 minute after switch
on due to a digitizer hardware fault. No error message is displayed at the NX
workstation.
Cause 1
Missing power for CPMI board or CPMI board defective.
Solution 1
Check the status of the LEDs on the CPMI board. See service manual chapter 3.4 for a
description about the LED default status.
The table enclosed lists the possible solutions by CPMI board LEDs:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Main Title
Sub title
DD+DIS230.10E
CPMI Board LED Status
Measure to solve the Problem
LD9#17 (3.3VD) does not light up,

LD16 (red "watch dog" LED) is on
(permanent or blinking)
Replace CPMI Power Distribution Board

LD12 (red FPGA LED) is on
(permanent)


LD4#2 (1.5V_MOD) does not light up,
LD5#2 (1.5V_PL) does not light up,
LD3#2 (2.5V_SDRAM) does not light
up, LD16 (red "watch dog" LED) ) is
on (permanent or blinking)
LD7#17 (24V_POL) does not light up
LD1#5 (VCC_USB) does not light up

Replace CPMI board
P1#4 (ETH10/100) and LD1#4

(ETH_REC) do not light up (not
permanent and not intermittently)
If all measures described in section 2.1.1

are already performed: Exchange CPMI
board.
Cause 2
CF Card defective.
Solution 2
Step 1: Confirm that the CF card is defective as follows:

(1) On the NX workstation enter the IP address of the digitizer in the browser
address window.
(2) Evaluate as follows:
If the login appears, the CF card is OK.
If following text is displayed: "Contents of ram:///" accessing the CF

card is not possible.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS230.10E
Step 2: Check whether the CF card is inserted properly.

Step 3: Final confirmation that CF card is defective:
(1) Insert the CF card in an external CF card reader.
(2) Access the CF card via the Windows Explorer.
(3) Evaluate as follows:
If the CF card is not recognized by the Windows operating system, this is
the confirmation that it is defective.
If the content of the C: partition is displayed, the CF card is OK. In this
case replace the CPMI board. See als NOTE below.
NOTE:
When viewing the contents of the digitizer CF card in the Windows Explorer only the
C: partition is visible. The partitions D: and E: are not displayed.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Main Title
Sub title
DD+DIS230.10E
Image Faults
3.1
Calibration Lines
Symptom
Calibration Lines are visible in the clinical image or a flatfield image.
Cause
Calibration characteristics dont match physical characteristics of detector path.
Solution
(1)
Use the cleaning brush to clean the mirror and the entrance surface of the light
collector by moving the brush a few times.
(2)
Redo the shading calibration.
IMPORTANT:
On the NX Workstation the image is displayed in portrait mode (scanned in landscape,
viewed in portrait).
Example for Calibration Lines:
ROI (marked with rectangle, showing the typical limit pattern for calibration lines)
Figure 1: Calibration Lines in exaggerated view

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS230.10E
3.2
Banding
Symptom
Banding stripes are visible in the clinical image or a flatfield image.
Cause
Inhomogeneous slowscan movement
Solution
(1)
Check the table where digitizer is positioned. It must be a fixed position. No

vibrations may disturb the scanning.
(2)
If unacceptable image flaws still occurs:

AGFA Employees: Contact the Regional Support Network (RSN).
Non AGFA Employees: Contact your local AGFA partner.
IMPORTANT:
Example for Banding:
ROI (marked with rectangle, showing the typical limit pattern for banding)
Figure 2: Banding in exaggerated view

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Main Title
Sub title
DD+DIS230.10E
3.3
Dust Stripes
Symptom
Dust stripes are visible in the clinical image or a flatfield image.
Cause
Dust in the scan path
Solution
(1)
Use the cleaning brush to clean the mirror and the entrance surface of the light
collector by moving the brush a few times.
(2)
Re-expose the flatfield and evaluate again.
(3)
If unacceptable image flaws still occurs:

AGFA Employees: Contact the Regional Support Network (RSN).
Non AGFA Employees: Contact your local AGFA partner.
IMPORTANT:
Example for Dust stripes:
ROI (marked with rectangle, showing the typical appearance of dust stripes)
Figure 3: Dust stripes in exaggerated view

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS230.10E
Using the Limit Pattern to judge Image Flaws

The limit pattern CD ROM is part of digitizer delivery or available as spare part with
spare part number*: CM+9 5175 9160 0.
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
The following sections 4.1 and 4.2 describe how to judge image flaws by using the
Limit Pattern.
4.1
Preparation
Prepare using the limit pattern as follows:
(1)
Check the Image Plate before exposure
(2)
Erase the cassette
(3)
Create the Flatfield Test Image
(4)
Scan the Flatfield Image
(5)
Check the Imag at the Lightbox or Viewing Station
Refer to the digitizer Service Documentation, Chapter 1, "Controls, Connections, and

Setup Procedures" section Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System for
details.
4.2
Comparing the Flatfield with the Test Pattern "Lowest Acceptable Quality"
4.2.1
Importing Limit Pattern
(1)
Insert the limit pattern storage medium (part of digitizer delivery) into the NX
workstation CD ROM drive.
(2)
On the NX workstation select the Main Menu.
(3)
Select <import images>.
(4)
Browse to the CD ROM drive to select the limit pattern.
(5)
Wait till the image is imported (approx. 15 seconds).
(6)
Select the Examination menu.
(7)
Print the flatfield image or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Main Title
Sub title
DD+DIS230.10E
4.2.2
Comparing Limit Pattern with Flat Field

Compare the Limit Pattern with the flat field:
At the lightbox or the viewing station visually compare the flatfield with the limit pattern.
The limit pattern represents the lowest acceptable image quality.
Evaluation:
If the scanned image visually looks as good as or better than the limit pattern, the
image quality is okay.
If there are unacceptable effects see section 3 of this document.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.4
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225

This document describes the location and meaning of the Codes and LEDs
on the different Printed Circuit Boards (PCB) for repair activities.
It describes how to detect defective boards.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial Version
Document
Title
Not applicable


eq_03-4_codings_e_template_v08
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................4
HANDLING CONTROL BOARD...............................................................................................5
CPMI BOARD (PHOTO MULTIPLIER INTERFACE) ...............................................................7
STATUS INDICATOR ON THE USER INTERFACE BOARD ................................................11

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Introduction
This chapter describes the location and meaning of the switches and LEDs
of the CR 30-X 2nd boards.
The CR-30 X 2nd comprises of the following boards:
CPMI Board (Photo Multiplier Interface)
CPMI Power Distribution Board
Erasure LED Control Board
Calibration Board
PMM Board (Photo Multiplier Module)
It is recommended to use a coloured printout of this document to support the better

visual understanding of the boards.
This document displays the LEDs and switches only. Fuses are not displayed.
IMPORTANT:
In case of an error check only the LEDs on the CR 30-X 2nd boards.
Never replace any fuses in case of an error.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E

NOTE:
The following Figure 1 shows the Handling Control Board and the position of the
switches and LEDs.
ON
Figure 1
Meaning
S1/1
ON = Normal operation (= default)

OFF = Debug position. Only for R&D purpose.
S1/2
Not used.
S3
Board reset. Only for R&D purpose.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
The following table shows the conditions indicated by the LEDs.
LED
LD1
LD2
Status Indicator
Red
Red
Constant
Constant
Meaning
ON*
+5 V Logic Supply present
OFF
+5 V Logic Supply not present
ON
+5 V Logic Supply not present, or

Application Software download
in progress, or
Application Software not running
/ hangup, or
RESET button S3 is pressed
LD3
Red
Flashing
OFF*
Application Software, services watchdog

present
ON*
Live LED (SW controlled) flashing with

2 Hz shows Firmware alive
OFF
Firmware not running, or

RESET button S3 is pressed
* Default during operation

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

CPMI Board (Photo Multiplier Interface)

NOTE:
The following Figure 2 shows the CPMI Board and the position of the switches
and LEDs.
Figure 2
Switch
Meaning
S1#2
Reset of CPU
S1#12
Reset Hardware

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
The following table shows the conditions indicated by the LEDs.
LED
LD1#2
LD1#3
LD1#4
LD1#5
LD1#17
LD1#19
LD2#2
LD2#17
LD3#2
LD3#17
Status Indicator
Orange
Green
Orange
Green
Green
Green
Orange
Green
Green
Green
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Meaning
ON*
Chip select (CS) off-board Flash active
OFF
CS off-board Flash not active
ON*
CF card active.
OFF
CF card not active.
ON*
Connection via Ethernet
OFF
Connection via Ethernet failed, Ethernet

Receive activity
ON*
VCC-USB supply voltage available
OFF
VCC-USB supply voltage not available
ON*
+12 V / -12 V Optic Module supply

voltage available
OFF
+12 V / -12 V Optic Module supply

voltage not available
ON*
+5 V PMT (Digital) supply

voltage available
OFF
+5 V PMT (Digital) supply

ON*
CS-on-board Flash active
OFF
CS-on-board Flash not active
ON*
+12 V / -12 V Calibration Board supply

voltage available
OFF
+12 V / -12 V Calibration Board supply

ON*
+2.5 V SDRAM, CPU voltage available
OFF
+2.5 V SDRAM, CPU voltage not

available
ON*
+ 20 V / -10V PMT (Analog) supply voltage

available
OFF
+ 20 V / -10V PMT (Analog) supply


06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
LED
LD4#2
LD4#12
LD4#17
LD5#2
LD5#12
LD5#17
LD7#17
LD8#17
LD9#17
LD10#17
Status Indicator
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Meaning
ON*
+1.5 V Core, CPU voltage available
OFF
+1.5 V Core, CPU voltage not available
ON*
+1.5 V CPU supply voltage available
OFF
+1.5 V CPU supply voltage not available,

LD16 (red) ON
ON*
+8 V PMI intern analog supply voltage

available
OFF
+8 V PMI intern analog supply voltage not

available
ON+
+1.5 V PLL, CPU voltage available
OFF
+1.5 V PLL, CPU voltage not available
ON*
+2.5 V CPU voltage available
OFF
+2.5 V CPU voltage not available,

LD16 (red)
ON*
+12 V CAN bus line driver, supply voltage

available
OFF
+12 V CAN bus line driver supply voltage

not available. No connection to Cassette
Handling Board.
ON*
+24 V (Polygon) supply voltage Power

Distribution Board and PMI Board
available
OFF
+24 V (Polygon) supply voltage Power

Distribution Board and PMI Board not
available
ON*
+5,0 V PMI Board boot-up
OFF
+5,0 V supply voltage (PMI intern) failed,

LD16 (red) ON
ON*
+3,3 V supply voltage, PMI Board boot-up
OFF
+3,3 V supply voltage (PMI intern) failed,

LD16 (red) ON
ON*
+1,2 V supply voltage available
OFF
+1,2 V supply voltage (FPGA,

PMI intern) failed, LD12 (red) ON

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
LED
LD12
LD13
LD14
LD15
LD16
Status Indicator
Red
Orange
Orange
Orange
Red
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Meaning
ON
FPGA empty, not programmable
OFF*
FPGA programmable
ON*
SW LED0 (USB CAN) active
OFF
SW LED0 (USB CAN) not active
ON*
SW LED1 (CD/lC/SPI) active
OFF
SW LED1 (CD/lC/SPI) not active
ON*
SW LED2 (Timer 1/sec) active
OFF
SW LED2 (Timer 1/sec) not active

LD16 (red) ON
ON
PMI self-test failed, Read/Write failure to

RAM, Board internal supply voltages not
present, SW LED3 (Fail/Java/Swap)
OFF*
PMI self-test successful

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Status Indicator on the User Interface Board

NOTE:
The following Figure 3 shows the Status Indicator of the User Interface Board.
blue
green or
red
Figure 3
Status Indicator
Blue
Digitizer Status
Meaning
Constant Activating the erasure cycle.
ON if erasure cycle active.
Constant Stand-by mode (READY)
ON if:
Ready / Stand-by
Cassette is ready for removal.
Green
Flashing
Red
Busy with scanning and

transporting cassette and
image plate.
ON during scan cycle active.
Constant Service mode

Flashing
Warm up / Self-test
Processing
Software down
Error
Check NX workstation for

further information and detailed
instructions.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Replacements / Repair Procedures
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225

This document describes the replacements of parts including verification method.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial version
Document
Title
DD+DIS230.10E
CR 30-X 2nd, Chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations


eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v07
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

(2)
the product.
CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.
NOTE:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 2
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENTS AT THE BASE FRAME ..............................................................................5

1.1
Replacing the Front Cover ........................................................................................................5
1.2
Replacing the Left Cover ..........................................................................................................7
1.3
Replacing the Right Cover ......................................................................................................10
1.4
Replacing the Top Cover ........................................................................................................12
1.5
Replacing the User Interface Board........................................................................................14
1.6
Replacing the Safety Switch ...................................................................................................17
1.7
Replacing the Main Switch with Wire Harness .......................................................................21
1.8
Replacing the Power Supply...................................................................................................26
1.9
Replacing the USB Cable .......................................................................................................30
REPLACEMENTS IN THE CASSETTE INPUT MODULE .....................................................33

2.1
Replacing the Cassette Opener Assembly .............................................................................33
2.2
Replacing the Opener Motor M3.............................................................................................39
2.3
Replacing the toothed Belt for Opener Motor M3 ...................................................................43
2.4
Replacing the Chip Reader.....................................................................................................46
2.5
Replacing the Handling Control Board ...................................................................................49
2.6
Replacing the Cassette Unlatch Assembly.............................................................................52
2.7
Replacing the Cassette Fixation Unit......................................................................................56
2.8
Replacing the Cassette Fixing Motor M1................................................................................60
2.9
Replacing the IP Sensor Cable...............................................................................................64
2.10
Replacing the Tag Reader Cable............................................................................................67
2.11
Replacing the User Interface Cable ........................................................................................70
REPLACEMENTS IN THE CASSETTE TRANSPORT MODULE ..........................................73

3.1
Replacing the Drawer Unit ......................................................................................................73
3.2
Replacing the Drawer Motor M4 .............................................................................................78
3.3
Replacing the Drawer Motor Belt ............................................................................................82
3.4
Replacing the Permanent Magnets ........................................................................................85
3.5
Replacing the Upper Roller Assembly ....................................................................................88

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 3
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

3.6
Replacing the Input Rollers.....................................................................................................91
3.7
Replacing the Transport Roller Motor M5...............................................................................97
3.8
Replacing the Belt of the Transport Roller Motor..................................................................101
3.9
Replacing the Roller Clamping Motor M6 .............................................................................106
3.10
Replacing the Belt of the Roller Clamping Motor..................................................................110
3.11
Replacing the Erasure Unit ...................................................................................................115
3.12
Replacing the Guide Plate Erasure Unit ...............................................................................117
3.13
Replacing the Roller IP Sensor.............................................................................................119
3.14
Replacing the Cleaning Brush ..............................................................................................122
REPLACEMENTS IN THE SCANNER MODULE.................................................................124

4.1
Replacing the Gearbox with Motor M2 and Scan Rollers.....................................................124
4.2
Replacing the Slow Scan Motor M2......................................................................................124
4.3
Replacing the Upper Scan Rollers........................................................................................127
4.4
Replacing the Reflector with Brush.......................................................................................132
4.5
Replacing the PMT with Light Collector................................................................................135
4.6
Replacing the Calibration Board ...........................................................................................136
4.7
Replacing the PMI Board ......................................................................................................139
4.8
Replacing the CF Card (Solid State Disk) ............................................................................143
4.9
Replacing the Power Integration Board ................................................................................145
4.10
Replacing the Optic Module..................................................................................................148
4.11
Replacing the Right Roller Lift Assembly..............................................................................151
4.12
Replacing the Left Roller Lift Assembly ................................................................................155
4.13
Replacing the Guide Plate Scanner Input.............................................................................161
4.14
Replacing the Pane in Scanner ............................................................................................164
4.14.1
Removing the Pane in Scanner ............................................................................................164
4.14.2
Mounting the new Pane in Scanner......................................................................................171

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 4
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Replacements at the Base Frame
1.1
Replacing the Front Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART*:
CM+9 5178 1515 0
* The last digit in the spare part number
indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual
revision of the spare part is delivered.
Figure 1
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
5 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
Switch off the digitizer (A).
(2)
Disconnect the cables (B).
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 2

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 3
(5)
Open two upper (A) and two

lower screws (B) a few turns.
5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 4
(6)

table and pull out the front
cover approximately 5 cm (A).
(7)
Disconnect the cable (B).
(8)
Remove the front cover.
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 5

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 6
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
Verification:
Result:
1.2
(1)
Mount in reverse order.
(1)
(2)
Wait till the green light at the user interface lights up

(takes approximately 1,5 minutes).
The front cover is replaced.
Replacing the Left Cover

CM+6018180
Figure 6
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
8 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 7
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 8
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 8
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
Remove two screws (A).
(6)
Take off the top cover (B, C).
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 9
(7)
Remove the left cover.
5175_c35_005.cdr
Figure 10
ASSEMBLY:
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(1)
(2)

The left cover is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 9
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
1.3
Replacing the Right Cover

CM+9 5175 1504 1
Figure 11
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
8 minutes
A
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 12

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 10
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 13
CAUTION:
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 14
(7)
Remove the right cover.
5175_c35_006.cdr
Figure 15

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
Verification:
Result:
1.4
(1)
(1)
(2)

The right cover is replaced.
Replacing the Top Cover

CM+9 5178 1525 0
Figure 16
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
5 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 12
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 17
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 18
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 13
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 19
ASSEMBLY:
Verification:
Result:
1.5
(1)
(1)
(2)

The top cover is replaced.
Replacing the User Interface Board

CM+9 5175 1580 0
Figure 20

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 14
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Small size (PZ1)
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
8 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 21
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 22

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 15
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 23
(6)

(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 24
(9)
Remove four screws.
(10) Remove the user interface

board
5175_c35_00B.cdr
Figure 25

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 16
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
Verification:
Result:
1.6
(1)
(1)
(2)

The user interface board is replaced.
Replacing the Safety Switch

CM+9 5178 4010 0
Figure 26
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
15 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 17
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 27
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 28
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 18
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(7)
(8)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 29
(8)
5175_c35_005.cdr
Figure 30
(5)
Remove two screws.
5175_c35_009.cdr
Figure 31

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 19
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(6)
Disconnect all connectors. See

NOTE below.
5175_c35_007.cdr
Figure 32
NOTE:
The connectors have a lock
integrated which prevents
disconnection if pulling at the cable.
To remove the cables pull at the
connector.
Tip: Use needle nosed pliers to
facilitate removal of the connectors.
5175_c35_008.cdr
Figure 33
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Mount in reverse order. See IMPORTANT note below.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 20
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
IMPORTANT:
C
To ensure proper switching of the

safety switch mount it as follows:
(1)
Close the front cover (A).
(2)
Shift the safety switch towards

the stop (B).
(3)
Fasten the two safety switch

screws (C).
5175_c35_090.cdr
Figure 34
Verification:
Result:
1.7
(1)
(2)
Wait for some seconds, until the red user interface LED starts blinking.
(3)
Open the front cover approximately 1 to 2 cm: The safety switch has to interrupt
and the user interface LED has to go off.
The Safety Switch is replaced.
Replacing the Main Switch with Wire Harness

CM+9 5178 8585 0
Figure 35
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
7 mm
Small size
(1 x 5,5 mm)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 21
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 36
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 37
DANGER:
If the power cord is connected and the main switch is switched on the input
side of the power supply is connected to high voltage. Risk of life.
Remove all cables in the rear of the digitizer before opening of the rear cover

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 22
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
Open the screws in the rear (A).
(6)
Open the rear cover (B).
5175_c35_010.cdr
Figure 38
(7)
Supporting the rear cover by

hand, open three screws at the
input side of the power supply a
few turns.
5175_c35_011.cdr
Figure 39
(8)
Disconnect the cables at the

mains inlet.
5175_c35_012.cdr
Figure 40

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 23
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(9)
Remove the nut (A) at the filter.

A
(10) Release the cable (B).
5175_c35_013.cdr
Figure 41
(11) Remove two screws (A).

(12) Take out the Main Switch with
Wire Harness (B).
5175_C35_014.cdr
Figure 42
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Mount in reverse order. See Safety Notes and NOTE below.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 24
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DANGER:
green/yellow
black
If the cables at the input side of

the power supply are mounted
wrong, the housing of the digitizer
can be connected to high voltage.
Risk of life.
Mount the cables at the power
supply input as indicated on the
cables and shown in Figure 43.
green/yellow
black
5175_c35_015.cdr
black
Figure 43
WARNING:
to electric shocks.
voltage inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical
NOTE:
Insert the wire rope (A) in cable
holder (B) before mounting the top
cover.
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 44
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system.
The accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 25
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Verification:
Result:
1.8
(1)
(2)
Wait for some seconds, until the red user interface LED starts blinking.
(3)
Open the front cover approximately 1 to 2 cm: The safety switch has to interrupt
and the user interface LED has to go off.
The Main Switch with Wire Harness is replaced.
Replacing the Power Supply

CM+9 0486 1420 0
Figure 45
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 26
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 46
DANGER:
If the power cord is connected and the main switch is switched on the input
side of the power supply is connected to high voltage. Risk of life.
Remove all cables in the rear of the digitizer before opening of the rear cover
(3)
(4)
5175_c35_010.cdr
Figure 47

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 27
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
Supporting the rear cover by

hand, open screws at input and
output side of the power supply
a few turns.
5175_c35_016.cdr
Figure 48
(6)
Remove the power supply.
5175_c35_017.cdr
Figure 49
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Mount in reverse order. Observe three Safety Notes and the NOTE below.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 28
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
green/yellow
DANGER:
black
If the cables at the input side of

the power supply are mounted
wrong, the housing of the digitizer
can be connected to high voltage.
Risk of life.
Mount the cables at the power
supply input as indicated on the
cables and shown in Figure 50.
green/yellow
black
black
5175_c35_015.cdr
Figure 50
CAUTION:
If the cables at the output side at the
top of the power supply are
mounted wrong, all printed circuit
black
boards will be defective after
switch-on.
red
Mount the cables as shown in

Figure 51.
5175_c35_017a.cdr
Figure 51
WARNING:
to electric shocks.
voltage inform the responsible organization 2 about the necessity of the electrical
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system.
The accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 29
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
NOTE:
holder (B) before mounting the Top
Cover.
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 52
Verification:
Result:
1.9
(1)
(2)
Wait until the boot-up is finished: The user interface LED has to be green.
The Power Supply is replaced.
Replacing the USB Cable

CM+9 0477 1112 0
Figure 53
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
cutter

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 30
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 54
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 55
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 31
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 56
(7)
Disconnect the cable at the PMI

board (A).
(8)
Cut the cable ties at the USB

connector (B).
(9)
Open the cable holders.
(10) Take out the USB cable.
5175_c35_018.cdr
Figure 57
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Mount in reverse order. See NOTE below.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 32
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
NOTE:
Mount the cable holder this way that
the USB symbol looks to the inner
side.
5175_c35_019.cdr
Figure 58
Verification:
Result:
(1)
Perform a backup on USB stick. For details refer to chapter 3.2, Machine
specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment.
The USB cable is replaced.
Replacements in the Cassette Input Module
2.1
Replacing the Cassette Opener Assembly

CM+9 5178 5200 0
Figure 59

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 33
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
20 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 60
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 61

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 34
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 62
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 63
(9)
Remove all cables at the

handling control board.
(10) Open all cable holders at the

handling control board. See
NOTE below.
(11) Remove one screw.
(12) Remove the handling control
board.
5175_c35_020.cdr
Figure 64

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 35
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
NOTE:
For opening of the rectangular cable
holders use the fingernail or a
screwdriver.
5175_c35_082.cdr
Figure 65
(13) Turn at spindle to open the

cassette fixation a few turns.
5175_c35_091.cdr
Figure 66
(14) Remove the cables at the

cassette edge detection switch.
5175_c35_092.cdr
Figure 67

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 36
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(15) Disconnect the cable at the

E-Label.
(16) Open the corresponding cable
holders.
5175_c35_103.cdr
Figure 68
(17) Remove the screws at the

Cassette Fixation Unit left hand
side.
5175_c35_021a.cdr
Figure 69
(18) Remove the screws at the

Cassette Fixation Unit right
hand side.
(19) Remove the Cassette Fixation
Unit.
5175_c35_022.cdr
A
Figure 70

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 37
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(20) Remove hree screws (A).

(21) Remove the Cassette Opener
assembly (B).
B
A
A
5175_C35_023.cdr
Figure 71
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
Connect the cables at the

cassette edge detection switch
as shown in Figure 72
orange
white
black
5175_c35_095.cdr
Figure 72
NOTE:
Mounting the cassette fixation unit is
easier if the cassette opener is in
position open. Pull at the opener belt
to open the cassette opener.
5175_c35_028.cdr
Figure 73

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 38
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Verification:
Result:
2.2
(1)
Insert a cassette with an unexposed image plate in the digitizer.
(2)
At the workstation select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(3)
Select ID to identify the image: Scanning starts.
(4)
Confirm that the image arrives at the workstation.
(5)
Reject the image.
The Cassette Opener Assembly is replaced.
Replacing the Opener Motor M3

CM+9 5178 8530 0
Figure 74
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 39
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 75
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 76
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 77

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 40
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 78
(9)
Remove cable at P10 at the

P10
5175_c35_024.a
Figure 79
(10) Open cable holders.

(11) Remove four screws.
(12) Remove the motor.
5175_c35_025.ai
Figure 80

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 41
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
IMPORTANT:
Mount the motor this way that the
cable outlet at the motor is at the "9
o'clock position" (seen from the left
hand side).
5175_c35_026.ai
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Opener Motor M3 is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 42
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.3
Replacing the toothed Belt for Opener Motor M3

CM+9 5178 4005 0 (Set of 4 belts for
Opener Motor M4, Transport roller
Motor M5, Drawer Motor M4, Roller
Clamping Motor M6)
Figure 81
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 82

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 43
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 83
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 84
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 85

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 44
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(9)
Take off the opener belt.
5175_c35_027.cdr
Figure 86
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The toothed Belt for the Opener Motor is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 45
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.4
Replacing the Chip Reader

CM+9 0486 1417 0
Figure 87
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Small size (PZ1)
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 88

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 46
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 89
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 90
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 91

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 47
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(9)
Pull at the opener belt to open

the cassette opener.
5175_c35_028.cdr
Figure 92
(10) Remove four screws at the

holder of the handling control
board.
(11) Turn the holder with all cables

connected and lay it on top of
the cassette unit.
A
5175_c35_028a.cdr
Figure 93
(12) Disconnect cable (A).

(13) Remove two screws (B).
(14) Remove the chip reader.
B
5175_c35_029.cdr
Figure 94

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 48
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
2.5
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Chip Reader is replaced.
Replacing the Handling Control Board

CM+9 5178 4510 0
Figure 95
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
20 minutes including stall calibration

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 49
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 96
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 97
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 98

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 50
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 99
(9)
Remove all cables at the

(10) Remove one screw.

(11) Remove the handling control
board.
5175_c35_020.cdr
Figure 100
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
CALIBRATION:
(1)
Perform a stall calibration for all motors.

Refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 51
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Verification:
Result:
2.6
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Handling Control Board is replaced.
Replacing the Cassette Unlatch Assembly

CM+9 5178 5600 0
Figure 101
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
20 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 52
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 102
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 103
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 104

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 53
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 105
(9)

P8
5175_c35_030.ai
Figure 106
(11) Remove three screws.

(12) Remove the unlatch assembly.
5175_c35_unlatch.cdr
Figure 107

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 54
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
NOTE:
Use the notch in the motor base plate
to mount the unlatch assembly
properly in its mounting pins.
5175_c35_085.cdr
Figure 108
CALIBRATION:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
Perform a stall calibration for the unlatch motor.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The cassette unlatch assembly is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 55
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.7
Replacing the Cassette Fixation Unit

CM+9 5178 5800 0
Figure 109
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 110

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 56
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 111
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 112
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 113

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 57
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(9)
Disconnect connectors P7 and

P8 at the handling control
board.
P8
P7
5175_c35_086.ai
Figure 114
(10) Remove the cables at the

cassette edge detection switch.
5175_c35_092.cdr
Figure 115

(13) Remove the Cassette Unlatch
Assembly.
Figure 116

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 58
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(14) Remove screws at the Cassette

Fixation Unit left hand side.
5175_c35_021a.cdr
Figure 117
(15) Remove screws at the Cassette

Fixation Unit right hand side
(A).
(16) Remove Cassette Fixation
Unit (B).
5175_c35_022.cdr
Figure 118
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
Connect the cables at the

cassette edge detection switch
as shown in Figure 119.
orange
white
black
5175_c35_095.cdr
Figure 119

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 59
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
CALIBRATION:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
2.8
Perform a stall calibration for the fixation motor.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Cassette Opener Assembly is replaced.
Replacing the Cassette Fixing Motor M1

CM+9 5178 5810 0
Figure 120
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 60
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 121
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 122
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 123

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 61
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(6)

table and pull out the front cover
approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 124
(9)

P7
5175_c35_031.ai
Figure 125

(12) Put the unlatch assembly on the
table.
Figure 126

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 62
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(13) Remove three screws at the

cassette fixing motor M1.
5175_c35_032.ai
Figure 127
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
IMPORTANT:
cable outlet at the motor is positioned
to the "3 o'clock position" (seen from
the right hand side).
5175_c35_033.ai
Figure 128
CALIBRATION:
(1)
Perform a stall calibration for the cassette fixation motor.


06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 63
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Verification:
Result:
2.9
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Cassette Fixation Motor is replaced.
Replacing the IP Sensor Cable

CM+9 5178 8620 0
Figure 129
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
8 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 64
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 130
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 131
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 132

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 65
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 133
(9)
Remove cable at connector

board.
P18
5175_c35_034.ai
Figure 134

(11) Disconnect cable at the Roller
IP Sensor.
5175_c35_035.ai
Figure 135

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 66
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
2.10
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The IP Sensor Cable is replaced.
Replacing the Tag Reader Cable

CM+9 5178 8610 0
Figure 136
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
8 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 67
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 137
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 138
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 139

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 68
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 140
(9)
Remove four screws at the

holder of the handling control
board.
(10) Turn the holder with all cables

connected and lay it on top of
the cassette unit.
A
5175_c35_028a.cdr
Figure 141
(11) Open the cable holders.

(12) Disconnect the cable at the Tag
Reader.
5175_c35_036.cdr
Figure 142

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 69
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
2.11
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Tag Reader Cable is replaced.
Replacing the User Interface Cable

CM+9 5178 8630 0
Figure 143
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
5 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 70
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 144
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 145
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 146

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 71
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 147
(9)

board.
P17
(11) Remove the user interface

cable.
5175_c35_037a.ai
Figure 148
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The User Interface Cable is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 72
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Replacements in the Cassette Transport Module
3.1
Replacing the Drawer Unit

CM+9 5178 6700 0
Figure 149
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 150

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 73
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 151
(5)
Disconnect two cables (A, B) at

the Erasure Unit.
(6)
Remove the screw for the

erasure unit (C).
(7)
Remove the erasure unit.
A
B
C
5175_c35_038.cdr
Figure 152
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 74
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(8)
Remove the IP Guide Plate.
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 153
(9)
(10) Remove the toothed belt (B).
A
B
5175_c35_040.cdr
Figure 154
(11) Shift the drawer unit to the

front.
(12) Remove two screws.
5175_c35_041A.cdr
Figure 155

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 75
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(13) Lift-up the drawer unit upper

plate.
5175_c35_043A.cdr
Figure 156
(14) Shift back the drawer unit as far

as possible (A).
(15) Take off the drawer unit (B).

See IMPORTANT note below.
A
5175_c35_043B.cdr
Figure 157
IMPORTANT:
Take care not to damage the surface of the transport rollers when removing and
mounting the drawer unit.
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Mount in reverse order. See NOTE below.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 76
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
NOTE:
Use the visual positioning aid to

position the drawer unit
properly. See Figure 158.
Mount the belt before mounting

the screws.
5175_c35_043C.cdr
Figure 158
CALIBRATION:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
Perform a stall calibration for the drawer motor.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Drawer Unit is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 77
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
3.2
Replacing the Drawer Motor M4

CM+9 5178 6055 0
Figure 159
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 160

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 78
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 161
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 162
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 163

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 79
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(9)
Remove cable at connector P9

at the handling control board.

P9
5175_c35_043.ai
Figure 164
(11) Disconnect two cables (A, B) at

the Erasure Unit.
(12) Remove the mounting screw

(C).
(13) Remove the erasure unit.
C
5175_c35_038.cdr
Figure 165
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 80
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(14) Remove the IP Guide Plate.
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 166
(15) Shift back the drawer unit.

B
(16) Lift-up the drawer unit plate (A).

(18) Remove the toothed belt.
(19) Remove the drawer motor.
5175_c35_044.cdr
Figure 167
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
CALIBRATION:
(1)


06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 81
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Verification:
Result:
3.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Drawer Motor is replaced.
Replacing the Drawer Motor Belt

Clamping Motor M6)
Figure 168
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 82
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 169
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 170
(5)
Disconnect two cables at the

Erasure Unit (A, B).
(6)
Remove the mounting screw

(C).
(7)
A
B
C
5175_c35_038.cdr
Figure 171

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 83
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
CAUTION:
(8)
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 172
(9)
Lift-up the drawer unit

plate (A).
(10) Remove the toothed belt.
5175_c35_045.cdr
Figure 173
ASSEMBLY:
(1)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 84
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
CALIBRATION:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
3.4

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Drawer Motor belt is replaced.
Replacing the Permanent Magnets

CM+9 5178 6765 0
Figure 174
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Small size
(1 x 5,5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 85
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 175
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 176
(5)

the Erasure Unit.
(6)

(C).
(7)
A
B
C
5175_c35_038.cdr
Figure 177

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 86
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
CAUTION:
(8)
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 178
(9)
Shift back the drawer unit (A)
(10) Replace the three large

permanent magnets (B).
(11) Replace the two small
permanent magnets (C).
B
C
5175_c35_047.cdr
Figure 179
ASSEMBLY:
(1)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 87
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Verification:
Result:
3.5
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Permanent Magnets are replaced.
Replacing the Upper Roller Assembly

CM+9 5178 6400 0
Figure 180
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
15 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 88
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 181
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 182
(5)

the Erasure Unit.
(6)

erasure unit (C).
(7)
A
B
C
5175_c35_038.cdr
Figure 183

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 89
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(8)
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 184
(9)
Open cable holders.
(10) Remove two screws on the

right (A) and two screws on the
left (B).
(11) Take out the Upper Roller
Assembly.
5175_c35_048.cdr
Figure 185
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
IMPORTANT:
Handle the upper roller assembly carefully: The rollers are sensitive.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 90
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Verification:
Result:
3.6
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Upper Roller Assembly is replaced.
Replacing the Input Rollers

CM+9 5178 6325 0
Figure 186
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
30 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 91
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 187
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 188
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 189

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 92
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 190
(9)

board.
P13
5175_c35_049.ai
Figure 191
IMPORTANT:
The motor is mounted with one spacer.
Take care not to loose the spacer.
5175_c35_050.ai
Figure 192

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 93
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(11) Open three screws.

5175_c35_051.ai
Figure 193

the Erasure Unit.
(14) Remove the screw for the

erasure unit (C).
C
5175_c35_038.cdr
Figure 194
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 195

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 94
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E

(18) Remove two screws on the
right (A) and two screws on the
left (B).
(19) Take out the Upper Roller
Assembly.
5175_c35_048.cdr
Figure 196
(20) Using a screwdriver remove

two ball bearings at left hand
side.
5175_c35_105.cdr
Figure 197
(21) Using a screwdriver remove

two ball bearings at right hand
side.
5175_c35_106.cdr
Figure 198

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 95
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(22) Take off the lower roller

assembly.
5175_c35_107.cdr
Figure 199
(23) Dismount the rollers. Take care

not to loose the two pins.
(24) Mount the new rollers at the
correct positions as shown in
Figure 200.
5175_c35_104.cdr
Figure 200
ASSEMBLY:
(1)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 96
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
IMPORTANT:
5175_c35_052.ai
Figure 201
Verification:
Result:
3.7
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Input Roller Assembly is replaced.
Replacing the Transport Roller Motor M5

CM+9 5178 4519 0
Figure 202

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 97
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 203
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 204

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 98
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 205
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 206
(9)

board.
P13
5175_c35_049.ai
Figure 207

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 99
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
IMPORTANT:
5175_c35_050.ai
Figure 208
(11) Open three screws.

5175_c35_051.ai
Figure 209
ASSEMBLY:
(1)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 100
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
IMPORTANT:
5175_c35_052.ai
Figure 210
Verification:
Result:
3.8
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Transport Roller Motor is replaced.
Replacing the Belt of the Transport Roller Motor

Clamping Motor M6)
Figure 211

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 101
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
20 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 212
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 213

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 102
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 214
(6)

(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 215
(9)
Open three screws. See

IMPORTANT note below.
5175_c35_051.ai
Figure 216

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 103
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
IMPORTANT:
5175_c35_050.ai
Figure 217
(11) Remove the belt.
5175_c35_053.cdr
Figure 218
ASSEMBLY:
(1)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 104
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
IMPORTANT:
5175_c35_052.ai
Figure 219
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Transport Roller Motor Belt is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 105
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
3.9
Replacing the Roller Clamping Motor M6

CM+9 5178 6025 0
Figure 220
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 221

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 106
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 222
(5)

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 223
(6)

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
(7)
(8)
5 cm
A
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 224

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 107
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(15) Remove cable at P12 of the

P12
5175_c35_054.ai
Figure 225

the Erasure Unit.
(17) Remove the screw for the

erasure unit (C).
C
5175_c35_038.cdr
Figure 226
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 108
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 227

(21) Remove the screws.
5175_c35_055.ai
Figure 228
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
CALIBRATION:
(1)
Perform a stall calibration for the Roller Clamping Motor (M6).


06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 109
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Verification:
Result:
3.10
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Roller Clamping Motor M6 is replaced.
Replacing the Belt of the Roller Clamping Motor

Clamping Motor M6)
Figure 229
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 110
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 230
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 231
(5)

the Erasure Unit.
(6)

erasure unit (C).
(7)
A
B
C
5175_c35_038.cdr
Figure 232

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 111
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
CAUTION:
(8)
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 233
(9)
Lift up the upper plate of the

drawer unit (A).
(10) Remove two screws at the

bearing plate (B, C).
B
A
C
B
5175_c35_096.cdr
Figure 234

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 112
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E

(12) Remove the screws.
5175_c35_055.ai
Figure 235
(14) Shift the guide plate to the rear.
5175_c35_088.cdr
Figure 236
(15) Shift the roller to the right.

(16) Take out the belt.
5175_c35_056.cdr
Figure 237

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 113
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
CALIBRATION:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
Perform a stall calibration for the Roller Clamping Motor (M6).

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Roller Clamping Motor Belt is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 114
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
3.11
Replacing the Erasure Unit

CM+9 5178 3600 0
Figure 238
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
6 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 239

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 115
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 240
(5)

the Erasure Unit.
(6)

erasure unit (C).
(7)
A
B
C
5175_c35_038.cdr
Figure 241
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Erasure Unit is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 116
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
3.12
Replacing the Guide Plate Erasure Unit

CM+9 5178 6013 0
Figure 242
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
8 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 243

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 117
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 244
(5)

the Erasure Unit.
(6)

(C).
(7)
Remove the Erasure Unit.
A
B
C
5175_c35_038.cdr
Figure 245
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 118
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(8)
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 246
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
3.13
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Guide Plate Erasure Unit is replaced.
Replacing the Roller IP Sensor

CM+9 9499 6950 0
Figure 247

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 119
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
5 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 248
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 249

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 120
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
Disconnect the cable (A).
(6)
Remove the Roller IP Sensor

(B).
5175_c35_035a.cdr
Figure 250
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Roller IP Sensor is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 121
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
3.14
Replacing the Cleaning Brush

CM+8 5175 1410 0
Figure 251
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
5 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 252

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 122
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 253
(5)
Take out the cleaning brush.
5175_c35_058.cdr
Figure 254
ASSEMBLY:
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(1)
(2)

The Cleaning Brush is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 123
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Replacements in the Scanner Module
4.1
Replacing the Gearbox with Motor M2 and Scan Rollers

The replacement instructions for the Gearbox with Motor M2 and Scan Rollers, spare
part number* CM+9 5178 2500 0, are enclosed to the spare part: Document number:
DD+DIS281.10E
4.2
Replacing the Slow Scan Motor M2

CM+9 5178 2580 0
Figure 255
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
2,5 mm
NOTE:
The Allen key 2,5 mm is part of delivery. It is required for the coupling between slow
scan drive and slow scan gearbox.
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 124
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 256
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 257
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 125
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 258
(7)
5175_c35_005.cdr
Figure 259
(8)
Disconnect the slow scan motor

(A).
(9)
Open the screw at the slow

scan coupling approximately
two turns (B).
(10) Remove the slow scan motor

(C).
B
C
Figure 260
ASSEMBLY:
(1)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 126
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Verification:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
Result:
The slow scan motor M2 is replaced.
4.3
Replacing the Upper Scan Rollers

CM+9 5178 2650 0
Figure 261
NOTE:
The front and rear scan rollers are different. As the left ball bearings are different in size
they only fit in the corresponding bearing seat. A mix-up is not possible.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
Small size
(1 x 5,5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes
IMPORTANT:
Handle the scan rollers carefully. They have a sensitive surface.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 127
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 262
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 263
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 128
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 264
(7)
(8)
5175_c35_010.cdr
Figure 265
(9)
5175_c35_006.cdr
Figure 266

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 129
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(10) Remove the left cover.
5175_c35_005.cdr
Figure 267
(11) Remove the mounting

screws (A).
(12) Remove the roller lift
assembly (B).
A
B
A
5175_ENC_201.cdr
Figure 268
(13) Take out the upper scan

rollers.
5175_c35_061a.cdr
Figure 269

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 130
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Mount in reverse order. See two NOTEs below.
NOTE:
When inserting the new upper scan
rollers slightly press down the roller
clamps using a small screwdriver.
5175_c35_062A.cdr
Figure 270
NOTE:
Cover.
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 271
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Upper Scan Rollers are replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 131
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
4.4
Replacing the Reflector with Brush

CM+9 5178 3020 2
Figure 272
CAUTION:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
20 minutes
A
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 273

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 132
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 274
CAUTION:
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 275

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 133
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(7)

adapter board.
5175_c35_101.cdr
Figure 276
(8)

optic module.
(9)
Remove the optic module.
5175_c35_102.cdr
Figure 277
(10) Remove two screws

(11) Take out the reflector with
brush.
5175_c35_064.cdr
Figure 278

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 134
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
IMPORTANT:
Check whether the connector at the
PMI Board is properly closed. This
may be accidentally opened when
inserting the optic module.
5175_c35_074.ai
Figure 279
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a shading calibration.
Refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations.
Verification:
Result:
4.5
The verification is done during the shading calibration procedure. There at the end a
flatfield is scanned and evaluated.
The Reflector with Brush is replaced.
Replacing the PMT with Light Collector

The replacement instructions for the PMT with Light Collector, spare part number*
CM+9 5178 3140 0, are enclosed to the spare part: Document number:
DD+DIS274.10E
The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document. When
ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 135
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
4.6
Replacing the Calibration Board

CM+9 5178 2470 0
Figure 280
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 281

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 136
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 282
CAUTION:
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 283
(7)
5175_c35_006.cdr
Figure 284

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 137
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(8)
Remove the mounting

screws (A).
(9)
Remove the roller lift assembly

(B).
A
B
A
5175_ENC_201.cdr
Figure 285
(10) Open two screws (A).

(11) Pull out the calibration board a
few centimeters (B).
(12) Disconnect the cable (C).
(13) Remove the calibration board.
B
C
5175_c35_065.cdr
Figure 286
ASSEMBLY:
(1)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 138
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
IMPORTANT:
Connect the cable before

pushing in the calibration board.
Check the proper seat of the

alignment pin before mounting
the screws of the calibration
board. See Figure 287.
Alignment Pin
5175_c35_066.cdr
Figure 287
Verification:
Result:
4.7
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Calibration Board is replaced.
Replacing the PMI Board

CM+9 5178 2170 0
Figure 288
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 139
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 289
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 290
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 140
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 291
(7)
Open two screws and shift back

the cable retainer (A).
(8)
Fasten the two screws of the

cable retainer.
(9)
Disconnect two cables at the

PMT board (B).
5175_c35_083.cdr
Figure 292
CAUTION:
Grounding washer can be lost.
Take care when removing the grounding screw at the PMT board.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 141
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(10) Disconnect connector (A).
(11) Remove the grounding screw

(B) at the PMT board. Take
care not to lose the washer.
(12) Remove CF card retainer with

screw (C).
(13) Disconnect the
PMT board (D).
E
(14) Open one connector at the

PMI board (E).
5175_c35_077.cdr
Figure 293
(15) Disconnect five cables at the

PMI board (A).
B

(17) Take out the PMI board.
5175_c35_068.cdr
Figure 294
(18) Insert the CF card in the new

PMI board.
5175_c35_070.cdr
Figure 295

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 142
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
IMPORTANT:
Mount the washer at the PMT board
grounding screw with the serrated
side down.
5175_c35_320.cdr
Figure 296
Verification:
Result:
4.8
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The PMI Board is replaced.
Replacing the CF Card (Solid State Disk)

CM+9 5170 9885 0
Figure 297

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 143
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
5 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 298
(3)
Remove screw with holder (A).
(4)
Pull out the CF card (B).
5175_c35_321.cdr
Figure 299

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 144
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
ASSEMBLY:
Verification:
Result:
4.9
(1)
(2)
Perform a software installation.

Refer to the installation instructions enclosed to the software on the Agfa
HealthCare Library => Computed Radiography => CR Digitizer => CR 30-X
2nd => Software.
The verification is done during software installation. There at the end a flatfield image is
scanned and evaluated.
The CF card is replaced.
Replacing the Power Integration Board

CM+9 5178 4550 0
Figure 300
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 145
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 301
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 302
CAUTION:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 146
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 303
(7)
Disconnect the two cables (A)

at the Power Integration Board.
(8)
Remove one screw (B).
(9)
Remove the Power Integration

Board.
B
5175_c35_071.cdr
Figure 304
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Power Integration Board is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 147
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
4.10
Replacing the Optic Module

CM+9 5178 2750 1
Tx30

Figure 305
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX30
TX20
1,5 mm Copper Filter
REQUIRED TIME:
60 minutes including shading calibration
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 306

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 148
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 307
CAUTION:
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 308

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 149
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(7)

adapter board.
5175_c35_101.cdr
Figure 309
(8)

optic module.
(9)
Remove the optic module.
5175_c35_102.cdr
Figure 310
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Mount in reverse order. SEE IMPORTANT note below.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 150
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
IMPORTANT:
Check whether the connector at the
PMI Board is properly closed. This
may be accidentally opened when
inserting the new optic module.
5175_c35_074.ai
Figure 311
CALIBRATION:
Verification:
Result:
4.11
The Optic Module is replaced.
Replacing the Right Roller Lift Assembly

CM+6024710
Figure 312

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 151
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Small size
(1 x 5,5 mm)
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
20 minutes
(1)

table (A).
(2)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 313
CAUTION:
Components underneath the top cover can be damaged.
Carefully take off the top cover.
(3)
(4)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 314

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 152
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_010.cdr
Figure 315
(7)
5175_c35_005.cdr
Figure 316
(8)
5175_c35_006.cdr
Figure 317

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 153
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(9)
Remove the mounting

screws (A).
(10) Remove the roller lift assembly

(B).
A
B
A
5175_ENC_201.cdr
Figure 318
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
NOTE:
When inserting the upper scan rollers
slightly press down the roller clamps
using a small screwdriver.
5175_c35_062A.cdr
Figure 319

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 154
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
NOTE:
Cover.
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 320
Verification:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
Result:
The Left Roller Lift Assembly is replaced.
4.12
Replacing the Left Roller Lift Assembly

CM+6024690
Figure 321

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 155
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Small size
(1 x 5,5 mm)
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
20 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 322
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 323

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 156
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
CAUTION:
Components underneath the top cover can be damaged.
Carefully take off the top cover.
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 324
(7)
Open the screws in the rear

(A).
(8)
5175_c35_010.cdr
Figure 325
(9)
5175_c35_005.cdr
Figure 326

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 157
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(10) Remove the right cover.
5175_c35_006.cdr
Figure 327

screws (A).
assembly (B).
A
B
A
5175_ENC_201.cdr
Figure 328
(13) Take out the upper scan

rollers.
5175_c35_061a.cdr
Figure 329

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 158
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(14) Disconnect the

motor cable (A).
(15) Disconnect the cable at the

E-Label (B).
(16) Remove four screws (C).
(17) Take out Gearbox with Motor

and Scan Rollers (D).
C
C
D
C
5175_c35_081.cdr
C
Figure 330

(19) Remove the Left Roller Lift
Assembly.
5175_c35_322.cdr
Figure 331
ASSEMBLY:
(1)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 159
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
NOTE:
When inserting the scan rollers
slightly press down the roller clamps
using a small screwdriver..
5175_c35_062A.cdr
Figure 332
NOTE:
Cover.
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 333
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Left Roller Lift Assembly is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 160
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
4.13
Replacing the Guide Plate Scanner Input

CM+9 5178 2484 0
Figure 334
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 335

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 161
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 336
CAUTION:
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 337
(7)
5175_c35_006.cdr
Figure 338

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 162
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(8)
5175_c35_005.cdr
Figure 339
(9)
Remove the screws of the

guide plate.
(10) Take out the guide plate.
5175_c35_075.cdr
Figure 340
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Verification:
Result:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Reject the image.
The Guide Plate Scanner Input is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 163
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
4.14
Replacing the Pane in Scanner

CM+9 5178 2413 0
Figure 341
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX30
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
90 minutes including shading calibration
4.14.1
Removing the Pane in Scanner
DISASSEMBLY:
(1)
(2)
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 342

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 164
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(3)

table (A).
(4)
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 343
CAUTION:
(5)
(6)
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 344
(7)
5175_c35_006.cdr
Figure 345

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 165
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(8)
Open the screws in the

rear (A).
(9)
5175_c35_010a.cdr
Figure 346

screws (A).
assembly (B).
A
B
A
5175_ENC_201.cdr
Figure 347
(12) Remove two screws (A).

(13) Pull out the calibration board a
few centimeters (B).
(14) Disconnect the cable (C).
(15) Remove the calibration board.
B
C
5175_c35_065.cdr
Figure 348

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 166
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(10) Disconnect the cables at the

adapter board.
5175_c35_101.cdr
Figure 349
(11) Remove four screws at the

optic module.
(12) Remove the optic module.
5175_c35_102.cdr
Figure 350
(13) Remove four screws (A) at

the rear bracket.
(14) Remove two screws (B) at
the IP guide.
(15) Remove the rear bracket
with IP guide (C).
A
A
C
B
B
5175_ENC_305.cdr
Figure 351

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 167
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(16) Open two screws and shift

back the cable retainer (A).
(17) Fasten the two screws of the

cable retainer.
(18) Disconnect two cables at the
PMT board (B).
B
5175_c35_083.cdr
Figure 352
CAUTION:
Grounding washer can be lost.
Take care when removing the grounding screw at the PMT board.
(19) Disconnect connector (A).
(20) Remove the grounding screw

(B) at the PMT board. Take
care not to lose the washer.
(21) Remove CF card retainer with

screw (C).
(22) Disconnect the
PMT board (D).
E
(23) Open one connector at the

PMI board (E).
5175_c35_077.cdr
Figure 353
CAUTION:
The retaining ring at the light collector fixation screws may fall off.
Do not turn more than 10 turns when opening the light collector fixation screws.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 168
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(24) Open the Light Collector

fixation screws approximately
10 turns.
10 x
10 x
5175_ENC_307.cdr
Figure 354
NOTE:
The light collector fixation screws
have 5 disk springs attached to
ensure a fixed pressure when the
screws are closed. The casing
with the disk spring package is
fixed via a small retaining ring.
This retaining ring may fall off,
when the fixation screws are
opened more than 15 turns, and
force is applied to drive the spring
package against the stop.
Screw
Fixation Screws closed
5 Disk
Springs
Fixation Screws opened
Casing
Retaining
ring
Springs
5175_c35_093a.cdr
Figure 355
(25) Remove two screws at

the PMT.
5175_ENC_308.cdr
Figure 356

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 169
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(26) Shift the PMT with Light

Collector slightly up to release
the retainer screw (A).
A
A
(27) Carefully slide out the PMT

with Light Collector (B).
5175_ENC_309.cdr
Figure 357
(28) Remove one screw of the rear

brush.
5175_c35_323.cdr
Figure 358
(29) Take out the pane.
5175_c35_325.cdr
Figure 359

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 170
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
4.14.2
Mounting the new Pane in Scanner
ASSEMBLY:
(1)
Insert the new Pane in

Scanner.
(2)
Mount the screw at the rear

brush.
(3)
Insert the calibration board.

Stop at approximately 5
centimeters before it is
completey in.
(4)
Mount the cable.
(5)
Insert the calibration board.

Check the proper seat of the
alignment pin before mounting
the screws of the calibration
board. See Figure 360.
(6)
Mount the right Roller Lift

Assembly.
(7)
Carefully insert the PMT with

Light Collector (A).
(8)
Insert the retainer screw (B).
Alignment Pin
5175_c35_066.cdr
Figure 360
5175_ENC_312.cdr
Figure 361

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 171
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(9)
Mount one screw at the PMT

approximately 2 turns:
Do not fasten it yet.
2x
5175_ENC_313.cdr
Figure 362
(10) Shift the light collector to the

right.
See NOTE below.
5175_ENC_314.cdr
Figure 363
NOTE:
The clearance of the light collector in the sand casting plate is approximately 1 mm.
To ensure, that the light collector is always mounted at the same position, the right
hand side is defined as "Zero position".

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 172
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(11) Screw down both Light

Collector fixation screws
(Figure 364 only shows the
right one).
5175_ENC_315.cdr
Figure 364
(12) Mount the second screw at

the PMT.
(13) Fixate both screws.
5175_ENC_316.cdr
Figure 365
(14) Mount the PMT board.

Be sure to mount the washer
at the PMT board grounding
screw with the serrated side
down.
See also IMPORTANT note
next page.
(15) Mount the connector (A).
A
5175_c35_318.cdr
Figure 366

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 173
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(16) Connect the cables at the

PMT board lower side.
(17) Mount the rear bracket with
film guide.
(18) Mount the optic module.

(19) Close the rear cover.
(20) Insert the wire rope (A) in
cable holder (B) as shown in
Figure 367.
(21) Close all covers.
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 367
CALIBRATION:
Verification:
Result:
The Pane in Scanner is replaced.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.5 / 174
Chapter 3.6
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225

This document describes all adjustments and calibrations that may be required during
corrective and preventive maintenance.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial version
Document
Title
DD+DIS230.10E
CR 30-X 2nd, Service Documentation Chapter 3.5,



eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v07
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

(2)
the product.
NOTE:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 2
DD+DIS230.10E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
OVERVIEW OF ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATIONS.........................................................4
CALIBRATIONS .......................................................................................................................5
2.1
Shading Calibration...................................................................................................................5
2.1.1
Exposing the Cassette ..............................................................................................................5
2.1.2
Scanning the Cassette..............................................................................................................7
2.1.3
Verifying a successful Shading Calibration...............................................................................9
2.1.4
Appendix: Possible Reasons for a failed Shading Calibration..................................................9
2.1.5
Appendix: Changes in the Shading Calibration Procedure if Full Leg / Full Spine Cassettes
are in Use................................................................................................................................10
2.2
Stall Calibration .......................................................................................................................12

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Overview of Adjustments and Calibrations

The following tables give an overview of adjustments and calibrations for the digitizer.
Adjustment Type
--
Calibration Type
Shading calibration
Stall Calibration
Use Case
Section
No adjustments required
--
Use Case
Section
After replacement of the PMT with Light

collector
After replacement of the Optic Module
Whenever stripes in slow scan position are

visible which cannot be removed by cleaning
with the cleaning brush
After replacement of following spare parts:

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
2.1
2.2

Cassette Fixing Motor (M1)
Cassette Unlatch Assembly
Drawer Unit
Drawer Unit motor (M4)
Roller Clamping Motor (M6)
Toothed belt for the Drawer Motor (M4)
Toothed belt for the Roller Clamping Motor
(M6)
After replacement of the Handling Control

Board (as this has the motor controllers
built in)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 4
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
Calibrations
2.1
Shading Calibration
Purpose
Use Case
Determine the sensitivity of the scanning system for each pixel of the scan line:
A flatfield is scanned. For each pixel a sensitivity factor is stored in an EEPROM
on the PMT.
Perform a shading calibration in following cases:
After replacement of the Photomultiplier (PMT) with light collector
After replacement of the Optic Module
Whenever stripes in slow scan position are visible, which cannot be removed by
cleaning of the scan line with the cleaning brush
REQUIRED TOOLS:
1,5 mm Copper Filter*
CM+9 5155 1015 2
USB Stick
Checked to be Virus free
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour
2.1.1
Exposing the Cassette

(1)

If the largest available cassette is a Full Leg / Full Spine (FLFS) Cassette, use
this cassette. In this case see the special instructions for Shading Calibration
with a FLFS cassette in section 2.1.5.
(2)
Open the cassette and check that the image plate (IP) is free of contamination
and without any signs of wear or defects like scratches or split off parts.
If any particles are detected, clean the IP according to the cleaning procedure.
If any defects are detected, inform the customer about the defect and use
another artifact free IP.
(3)
Erase the IP.
(4)
Mount the 1,5 mm Cu-filter at the modality.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(5)

shown in Figure 1.
The black side of the cassette must
show towards the tube.
X-Ray tube
Anode
Axys
Black Side
of Cassette
NOT OK
OK
517509aa.cdr
Figure 1
(6)

is fully exposed. The collimated
field must be larger than the image
plate.
Exposed area
NOT OK
OK
517509ac.cdr
Figure 2
(7)
Select the following exposure parameters to obtain a dose of 10 Gy:
12 mAs
75 kVp
Large focus
(8)
(9)
Turn the cassette 180.
(10) Expose the cassette again.

After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed in total
with a dose of approximately 20 Gy.
(11) Remove the Cu-filter from the X-ray device.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 6
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.1.2
Scanning the Cassette

(1)
On the NX workstation log-off the current user and log-in as "crservice".
(2)
Open the Internet Explorer.
(3)
Enter the digitizer IP address in the address window. See also NOTE below.
NOTE:
If the IP address is not known: Press 'Ctrl + Shift + H' to get the browser history list.
The IP address of the digitizer should be in the list.
(4)
Enter username (default: mega) and password (obtained during the classroom
training).
(5)
Select the service menu: <Maintain and Calibrate Shading

Calibration>
(6)
Select Calibrate. See Figure 3.

After pressing Calibrate the screen as shown in Figure 4 is displayed.
Figure 3
Figure 4

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(7)
Enter the exposed cassette in the

digitizer.
The massage Processing
calibration Image is displayed,
followed by the shading calibration
curve. See Figure 5.
Figure 5
IMPORTANT:
If a message pops up which indicates a failed shading calibration (e.g. Underexposed
- too low pixel values ) refer to section 2.1.4 for possible remedies.
NOTE:
The digitizer records 6 shading calibration lines, one for each facet of the polygon
mirror (See parameter NumberOfCalLines: 6 in Figure 5).
(8)
Remove the cassette from the digitizer.
(9)
Select menu <Logout> and follow the logout wizard.
(10) Close the browser.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 8
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.1.3
Verifying a successful Shading Calibration
Verification
(1)
Expose and scan a flatfield.
(2)
Print or archive the image.
(3)
Check the image for homogeneity in slow scan and fast scan direction.
Evaluation:
If the scanned image does not show any lines or stripes in fast scan or slow scan
direction or large area inhomogeneities no further action is required.
If there are unacceptable effects in slow scan or fast scan direction, see chapter
3.3, Troubleshooting.
Result
2.1.4
The shading calibration is finished.
Appendix: Possible Reasons for a failed Shading Calibration

There are following main reasons for a failed shading calibration:
Particles in the optical path Use the cleaning brush to clean the optical path.
Contamination and/or any defects on the image plate Clean the image plate
according to the cleaning procedure or use another image plate.
Cassette wrong exposed (too high / low dose) Check exposure parameters.
Cassette not exposed on its entire area (wrong collimation) Ensure the
cassette is entirely exposed.
PMT exposed to intensive light before calibration (in this case PMT has lower
sensitivity) wait until the PMT has back the normal sensitivity (time depends
on duration and brightness of the light exposure).

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 9
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.1.5
Appendix: Changes in the Shading Calibration Procedure if Full Leg / Full Spine
Cassettes are in Use
NOTE:
This section describes the changes in the shading calibration procedure, if a FLFS
cassette is used.
Reason for different proceeding: In opposite to Genrad (General Radiology)
cassettes, FLFS cassettes do not have the complete IP area covered with a
backscatter protection: The lead foil does not cover approximately 10 mm on the
upper and lower side of the cassette.
Genrad Cassette
FLFS Cassette
Backscatter
Protection
FLFS
10 mm
10 mm
FLFS
Figure 6
(1) When exposing the cassette observe following instruction:

Put two cassettes underneath the FLFS cassette. This covers the area where the
cassette has no backscatter protection. Only this area has to be covered, which is
used by the digitizer to determine the shading calibration curves.
Exposure 1
Exposure 2
FLFS cassette
Cassette
Shutter
Area used for

shading calibration
Area used for

shading calibration
FLFS cassette
FLFS cassette
Put a cassette underneath this area. This prevents that the missing
backscatter protection falsifies the shading calibration result.
517536ga.cdr
Figure 7

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 10
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(2) After exposure of the flatfield for the shading calibration erase the two cassettes
which were put underneath the FLFS cassette during exposure.
(3) When exposing the flatfield for verification of the shading calibration procedure it
is not required to put two cassettes underneath the FLFS cassette.
However observe following fact when evaluating the flatfield image:
When using a FLFS cassette for
flatfield exposure, the image will be
slightly darker in the upper and lower
image area where the backscatter
protection is removed (approximately
1 cm each).
These darker zones also have to be
used for image quality evaluation in
slow scan and fast scan direction to
verify a successful shading
calibration.
Flatfield with
FLFS Cassette
Flatfield with
Genrad Cassette
Effect exaggerated
Figure 8

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
2.2
Stall Calibration
Purpose
Use Case
The stall calibration determines the optimum motor current for stall detection:
The motor drives several times to its home and end position with different motor
currents. The mean value of these different motor currents is used as motor control
current, where the steps of the motor are in the specified, allowed range.
Perform a stall calibration in following cases:
After replacement of following spare parts:

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Drawer Unit
Toothed belt for the Drawer Motor (M4)
Toothed belt for the Roller Clamping Motor (M6)
After replacement of the Handling Control Board (as this has the motor
controllers built in)
REQUIRED TOOLS:
None
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 minute per stall calibration
(1)
(2)
Open the browser.
(3)
Enter the digitizer IP address in the address window.
(4)
If the IP address is not known: Look it up in the Configuration Tool of the

NX workstation.
(5)
training).
(6)
Select the service menu: <Maintain & Calibrate Stall

Calibration>

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 12
Repair and Service

DD+DIS230.10E
(7)
(8)
(9)
Select the required motor or select

All Motors to calibrate all
relevant motors one after another.
Wait until the stall calibration is
finished. See Figure 10 and
Figure 11 for example screens.
Select menu <Logout> and
follow the logout wizard.
CR 30-X Service
Stall Calibration
All Motors
Cassette Locker Motor (M17)
(10) Close the browser.

Figure 9
CR 30-X Service
CR 30-X Service
Stall Calibration
Stall Calibration
All Motors
All Motors
Stall Calibration for Cassette

Locker Motor (M17) is ongoing ...
Stall Calibration Locker

Stall Calibration finished: OK
iRun Locker UnlockIp= 49
Figure 10: Example screen
Result
Figure 11: Example screen
The stall calibration is successfully performed.

NOTE:
The stall calibration does not harm - it can be performed anytime. It is required
however only in the cases as described previous page.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 3.6 / 13
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 4
Imaging Services
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225

This document contains:
Reference diagrams for identification and location of assemblies inside the

machine including an alphanumeric reference list
Diagrams of printed circuit boards, if necessary
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial Version
Document
Title
Not applicable


eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v08
DD+DIS230.10E
Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
LIST OF CONTENTS
REFERENCE DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................................4

1.1
Frame........................................................................................................................................4
1.2
Circuit Boards............................................................................................................................4
1.3
Stepper Motors .........................................................................................................................5
1.4
Sensors, Switches and Components ........................................................................................5
1.5
Circuit Diagrams........................................................................................................................6
OVERVIEW OF COMPONENTS..............................................................................................7
2.1
Overview of Circuit Boards .......................................................................................................7
2.2
Overview of Stepper Motors .....................................................................................................8
2.3
Overview of other Components ................................................................................................9
CABLE CONNECTION OF COMPONENTS ..........................................................................10

3.1
Frame......................................................................................................................................10
3.1.1
Safety Switch (S2) ..................................................................................................................10
3.1.2
Flat Connector Strip (XK3)......................................................................................................11
3.1.3
Power Supply (B420) and Input Power (ST1).........................................................................12
3.2
Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................13
3.2.1
Handling Control Board (B419)...............................................................................................13
3.2.2
User Interface Board (B418) ...................................................................................................16
3.3
Scan Module ...........................................................................................................................17
3.3.1
Calibration Board (B412) ........................................................................................................17
3.3.2
Optic Module (B317) with CMAM Adapter Board ...................................................................18
3.4
Scanner Unit ...........................................................................................................................20
3.4.1
CPMM Board (B422)...............................................................................................................20
3.4.2
CPMI Board (B410).................................................................................................................22
3.4.3
CPMI Power Distribution Board (B411) ..................................................................................26
3.5
Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................29
3.5.1
Erasure LED Board (B423) .....................................................................................................29
3.5.2
Erasure LED Control Board (B424) ........................................................................................30

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Reference Diagrams
NOTE:
The reference lists include in an alphanumeric listing all electrical components with
reference to the corresponding circuit diagram for supporting the identification of all
components.
It is recommended to use a coloured printout of this document to support the better
visual understanding of the circuit diagrams.
1.1
1.2
Frame
Number
Component
Section
S2
Safety Switch
3.1.1
XK3
Flat Connector Strip
3.1.2
B420
Power Supply
3.1.3
Circuit Boards
Number
Component
Section
B419
3.2.1
B418
3.2.2
B412
Calibration Board
3.3.1
B422
CPMM Board
3.4.1
B410
CPMI Board
3.4.2
B411
CPMI Power Distribution Board
3.4.3
B423
Erasure LED Board
3.5.1
B424
3.5.2

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
1.3
1.4
Stepper Motors
Number
Component
M1
Cassette Fixing Motor
M2
Slow Scan Motor
M3
Cassette Opener Motor
M4
Drawer Unit Motor
M5
Transport Roller Motor
M6
Roller Clamping Motor
M7
Slow Scan Lift Motor
M17
Section
1.3
Sensors, Switches and Components

Number
Component
Section
S3
Main Switch
2.3
S1
Cassette Edge Sensor
3.2.1
B1
RF-Tag Reader
3.2.1
B2
IP Sensor
3.2.1
B425
E-Label Gear Factor
3.2.1
B429
E-Label Cassette Fixation Unit
3.2.1
B430
GS Adapter Board
3.2.1
B317
Optic Module with CMAM Adapter Board
3.3.2
ST1
Autocal Sensor
3.4.1
S4
Overheat Protection
3.5.2

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
1.5
Circuit Diagrams
Designation
Section
Frame
3.1
Cassette Unit
3.2
Scan Module
3.3
Scanner Unit
3.4
Erasure Unit
3.5

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Overview of Components
2.1
Overview of Circuit Boards
Figure 1

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
2.2
Overview of Stepper Motors
Figure 2

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
2.3
Overview of other Components
Figure 3

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Cable Connection of Components
3.1
Frame
3.1.1
Safety Switch (S2)
4
2
1 = XK3 - Flat Connector Strip (see number 1c in Figure 5)

2 = XK3 - Flat Connector Strip (see number 2b in Figure 5)
3 = Power Supply (see number 2 in Figure 6, +24 V)
4 = Power Supply (see number 3 in Figure 6, +24 V)
Figure 4

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.1.2
Flat Connector Strip (XK3)
c
1
e
f
d
3
e
f
e
f
4
b
d
4
e
f
a = P3 - CPMI Power Distribution Board (Red cable, +24 V)

b = P3 - CPMI Power Distribution Board (Red cable, +24 V)
c = S2 - Safety Switch (see number 1 in Figure 4, Red cable)
d = P5 - Handling Control Board (Red cable, +24 V)
e = P5 - Handling Control Board (Red cable, +24 V)
f = Not applicable
a = Not applicable
b = S2 - Safety Switch (see number 2 in Figure 4, Red cable)
c = Not applicable
d = Not applicable
e = P3 - Erasure LED Control Board (Orange cable, +24 V)
f = Not applicable
a = Not applicable
b = Power Supply (see number 4 in Figure 6, Black cable, GND)
c = Not applicable
d = Not applicable
e = P3 - Erasure LED Control Board (Black cable, GND)
f = Not applicable
a = Power Supply (see number 5 in Figure 6, Black cable, GND)
b = Not applicable
c = P5 - Handling Control Board (Black cable, GND)
d = P3 - CPMI Power Distribution Board (Black cable, GND)
e = P3 - CPMI Power Distribution Board (Black cable, GND)
f = P5 - Handling Control Board (Black cable, GND)
Figure 5

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.1.3
Power Supply (B420) and Input Power (ST1)
Power Supply (B420)
INPUT Power (ST1)
1
110-240VAC 50/60Hz
3
6 78
4
1
54 32
1 = PE - Ground Connection (Yellow - green cable, GND)

2 = S2 - Safety switch (see number 3 in Figure 4, Red cable, +24 V)
3 = S2 - Safety switch (see number 4 in Figure 4, Red cable, +24 V)
4 = XK3 - Flat Connector Strip (see number 3b in Figure 5, Black cable, GND)
5 = XK3 - Flat Connector Strip (see number 4a in Figure 5, Black cable, GND)
6 = PE - Ground Connection Main cable (Yellow - green cable, GND)
7 = S3 - Main switch (Black cable, ACN)
8 = S3 - Main switch (Black cable, ACL)
1 = S3 - Main switch (Black cable, L1)

2 = S3 - Main switch (Black cable, N1)
3 = PE - Gound Connection (Yellow - green cable, GND)
4 = Ethernet cable
Figure 6

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.2
Cassette Unit
3.2.1
Handling Control Board (B419)

Lift Ref
Pos
(B426)
Cassette Opener Motor (M3)
P10
P12
Transport Roller Motor (M5)
P13
P1
User
Interface
Board
(B418)
GS
Adapter
Board
(B430)
P17
P14
Slow
Scan
Lift
Motor
(M7)
Slow
Scan
Motor
(M2)
ST38
ST7
P11
P6
E-Label
Gear Factor
(B425)
E-Label
XK3
Cassette
Flat
Fixation
Connector Unit
Stip
(B429)
P5
P1#23
CPMI
Board
(B410)
P1
RF-Tag
Reader
(B1)
P1
P2
P3
P2
Erasure
LED
IP
Control
Board Sensor
(B424) (B2)
P16
P18
B419
* Not connected
P19
Test
and
Debug
Optional*
BU1#3
ST1#1
eLabel
Bootload
I/O Service* Debug*
P15
Cassette Edge Sensor (S1)
P9
Drawer Unit Motor (M4)
P8
P7
P4
Log
and
Debug
Port*
Figure 7

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Plug
Function
Pins
P1
CAN Interface
10
P2
RF-Tag Interface
P3
Interface for external E-Label
P4
Serial Log/Debug
10
P5
Power Supply
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
SlowScan SM0_A
Fixer SM0_B
Unlatch Assembly SM1_A
Drawer SM1_B
Opener SM2_A
Lift SM2_B
4
8
4
4
8
4
Supply
Connector
CAN_ GND (Pin 2)

CAN_GND (Pin 5)
Shield_0R_GND (Pin 9)
GND (Pin 3)
+5 V (Pin 4)
+5 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 3)
+5 V (Pin 1)
GND (Pin 7)
+24 V (Pin 1)
+24 V (Pin 2)
+24 V (Pin 3)
+24 V (Pin 4)
GND (Pin 5)
GND (Pin 6)
GND (Pin 7)
GND (Pin 8)
+39 V
+39 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
Connection to P1#23 on CPMI Board (B410)
Connection to P1 on RF-Tag Reader (B1)

Connection to E-Label Cassette Fixation Unit (B429) and
E-Label Gear Factor (B425)
Serial Log & Debug Interface
Connection to XK3 Flat Connector Strip
Connection to Slow Scan Motor (M2)

Connection to Cassette Fixer Motor (M1)
Connection to Cassette Unlatch Assembly
Connection to Drawer Unit Motor (M4)
Connection to Cassette Opener Motor (M3)
Connection to Slow Scan Lift Motor (M7)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
P12
P13
P14
Roller Clamp SM3

Roller Transport SM4
Lift RefPos Light Barrier
8
8
4
P15
P16
P17
Cassette Edge Sensor (S1)

3
8
10
P18
IP Sensor (B2)
P19
SM Log/Debug
10
BU1#3
E-Label I/O Service
ST1#1
Bootload/Debug
10
+24 V
+24 V
GND (Pin 3)
+5 V (Pin 4)
GND (Pin 7)
+24 V (Pin 1)
+24 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 9)
GND (Pin 10)
+5 V (Pin 1)
GND (Pin 3)
+5 V (Pin 4)
+5 V (Pin 1)
GND (Pin 5)
+5 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 3)
DGND (Pin 7)
Connection to Roller Clamping Motor (M6)

Connection to Transport Roller Motor (M5)
Connection to GS Adapter Board (B430) and Lift Ref Pos (B426)
Connection to Cassette Edge Sensor (S1)
Connection to P2 on Erasure LED Control Board (B424)
Connection to P1 on User Interface Board (B418)
Connection to IP Sensor (B2)
SM Log & Debug SPI exMem

Onboard E-Label Interface connector part of E-Label Module
Bootload/Debug Interface connector part of M32-Module

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.2.2
User Interface Board (B418)
P17
Handling
Control
Board
P1
Figure 8
Plug
Function
P1
CHC Interface
Pins
10
Supply
Connector
+24 V (Pin 1)
+24 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 8)
GND (Pin 9)
GND (Pin 10)
Connection to P17 on Handling Control Board (B419)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.3
Scan Module
3.3.1
Calibration Board (B412)
P1
CMAM
Adapter
Board
P1
B412
Figure 9
Plug
Function
P1
CAL Interface
Pins
12
Supply
Connector
+12 V (Pin 1)
GND (Pin 2)
-12 V (Pin 3)
Connection to P1 on CMAM Adapter Board

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.3.2
Optic Module (B317) with CMAM Adapter Board
P1
P1 Calibration Board (B412)
P4
P1#22 CPMI Board (B410)
P2
Optic Module (B317)
B317
P3
P2#22
CPMI
Board
(B410)
Figure 10

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Plug
Function
Pins
P1
CAL Interface
12
P2
Interface to Optic Module
25
P3
Interface to CPMI Board
15
P4
15
Supply
Connector
+12 V (Pin 1)
GND (Pin 2)
-12 V (Pin 3)
GND_POL (Pin 1)
+24 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 11)
GND ( Pin 12)
+12 V (Pin 13)
GND_POL (Pin 14)
-12 V (Pin 24)
GND (Pin 25)
+12 V (Pin1)
-12 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 9)
GND_POL (Pin 1)
GND (Pin 7)
GND (Pin 8)
+24 V_POL (Pin 9)
+12 V (Pin 14)
-12 V (Pin 15)
Connection to P1 on Calibration Board (B412)
Connection to Optic Module (B313)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.4
Scanner Unit
3.4.1
CPMM Board (B422)
P1#19
CPMI
Board
(B410)
P1
BU1#1
External
E-Label
ST1
Autocal
Sensor
P4
P2 CPMM Tube Board (B422)
P2
P3 CPMM Tube Board (B422)
Figure 11

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Plug
Function
Pins
P1
17
P2
Interconnection of CPMM
tube electronics
10
Supply
Connector
GND (Pin 1)
-10 V (Pin 2)
DGND (Pin 3)
+5 V (Pin 4)
GND (Pin 8)
+20 V (Pin 9)
HSP Dy6 high voltage,
max. 1000 V, 1 mA (Pin 2)
Connection to P3 on CPMM Tube Board (B422)
HSP2 Dy2, Dy3 and Dy4 HV voltage,

max. 800 V, 2 mA (Pin 6)
P4
Interconnection of CPMM
main electronics
BU1#1
External E-Label
HSP1 Dy5 high voltage,

max. 320 V, 2 mA (Pin 10)
-5 V_INT (Pin 1)
+5 V_INT (Pin 2)
+15 V_INT (Pin 3)
GND Analog (Pin 4)
+20 V_INT (Pin 5)
GND Analog (Pin 6, 7, 9, 10)
-
ST1
Connection to Autocal
Sensor
10
Connection to P2 on CPMM Tube Board (B422)
External E-Label
Connection to Autocal Sensor

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.4.2
CPMI Board (B410)
P5 CPMI Power Distribution Board (B411)
Debug 4*
JTAG*
P1
CPMM
Main Board
Compact
Flash
Card
Display
Debug*
External
E-Label*
P1#19
P1#3
P1#20
BU1#21
P1#22
P4 CMAM Adapter Board
P2#22
P3 CMAM Adapter Board
P1#23
P1 Handling Control Board (B419)
P1#5
USB
P1#4
Ethernet
P1#17
(Bottom Side)
P5#2
P23
B410
* Not connected
P33
P3#2
RS232
Debug*
Debug 2*
P1#2
P2#2
P4#2
Connector
Debug 1* Debug 3*
to Boot Board*
Figure 12

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Plug
Function
P1#2
Boot board
P1#3
Pins
Supply
Connector
64
Connection to Boot-Flash connector
CF connectivity
Compact Flash Card
P1#4
Ethernet Interface
Ethernet connection
P1#5
USB Interface
USB connection
P1#19
CPMM Interface
Connection to P1 on CPMM Main Board
P1#20
Debug
GND Analog (Pin 1)

-10 V (Pin 2)
GND Digital (Pin 3)
+5 VD (Pin 4)
GND Analog (Pin 8)
+ 20 V (Pin 9)
GND Digital (Pin 11)
-
P1#22
Optics Interface
15
P1#23
CAN Interface
10
P2#2
Debug
GND Polygon (Pin 1)

GND LD Modulator (Pin 7)
GND LD Modulator (Pin 8)
+24 V (Pin 9)
+12 V (Pin 14)
-12 V (Pin 15)
CAN Vcc Optional 5...15 V (Pin 1)
CAN GND (Pin 3)
CAN GND (Pin 6)
CAN Vcc 5...15 V (Pin 9)
-
15
Display Debug
Debug 1

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Plug
Function
Pins
P2#22
CAL Interface
P3#2
Debug
Supply
+12 V (Pin1)
-12 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 9)
-
P4#2
Debug
Debug 3
P5#2
Debug
Debug 4
P23
JTAG
JTAG
P33
Debug
RS232 Debug
P1#17
Power Interface
GND_Polygon (Pin 1)
+27.2 V Polygon (Pin 2)
GND_LD Modulator (Pin 3)
+12 V_LD Modulator (Pin 4)
-12 V LD Modulator (Pin 6)
+12 V CAL-Board (Pin 7)
GND CAL-Board (Pin 9)
-12 V CAL-Board (Pin 10)
Sense DGND (Pin 12)
GND PMT-Board (Pin 13)
+20 V PMT-Board (Pin 14)
-10 V PMT-Board (Pin 16)
GND Analog (Pin 19)
+8 V Analog (Pin 20)
+12 V CAN Bus (Pin 24)
Connection to P5 on CPMI Power Distribution

Board (B411)
15
50
Connector
Debug 2

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Plug
Function
Pins
P1#17
Power Interface
50
BU1#21
External E-Label
Supply
Connector
GND CAN Bus (Pin 25)

+12 V HD (Pin 28)
GND HD (Pin 29)
+5 V (Pin 32)
GND (Pin 33)
+5 V (Pin 34)
GND (Pin 35)
+5 V (Pin 36)
GND (Pin 37)
+5 V (Pin 38)
GND (Pin 39)
+5 V (Pin 40)
GND (Pin 41)
+5 V (Pin 42)
GND (Pin 43)
+5 V (Pin 44)
GND (Pin 45)
Sense_5 V (Pin 46)
GND (Pin 47)
+5 V (Pin 48)
GND (Pin 49)
+5 V (50)
Connection to P5 on CPMI Power Distribution

Board (B411)
External E-Label

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.4.3
CPMI Power Distribution Board (B411)
P3
B411
XK3 Flat Connector Strip
P5
P1#17
CPMI
Board
(B410)
Figure 13

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Plug
Function
Pins
P3
Power Supply
P5
CPMI Interface
50
Supply
Connector
+24 V (Pin 1)
+24 V (Pin 2)
+24 V (Pin 3)
+24 V (Pin 4)
GND (Pin 1)
+24 V Polygon Motor (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 3)
+12 V LD_Modulator (Pin 4)
-12 V LD_Modulator (Pin 6)
+12 V Calibration (Pin 7)
GND (Pin 9)
-12 V Calibration (Pin 10)
GND (Pin 12)
GND (Pin 13)
+20 V PMT (Pin 14)
-10 V PMT (Pin 16)
GND (Pin 19)
+8 V Analog Circuit (Pin 20)
CAN +12 V (Pin 24)
GND (Pin 25)
GND (Pin 29)
5 V Power Supply for 1.5 V Converter (Pin 32)
GND (Pin 33)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Plug
Function
P5
CPMI Interface
Pins
50
Supply
Connector
GND (Pin 35)

GND (Pin 37)
GND (Pin 39)
GND (Pin 41)
GND (Pin 43)
GND (Pin 45)
5 V Power Supply Digital Sense (Pin 46)
GND (Pin 47)
5 V Power Supply Digital Circuit (Pin 48)
GND (Pin 49)
5 V Power Supply Digital Circuit (Pin 50)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.5
Erasure Unit
3.5.1
Erasure LED Board (B423)
P1
Erasure LED
Control Board
(B424)
P1
B423
Figure 14
Plug
Function
P1
Erasure Interface
Pins
Supply
Connector
Connection to P1 on Erasure LED Control Board (B424)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
3.5.2
Erasure LED Control Board (B424)
Overheat
Protection
(S4)
P4
XK3 Flat Connector Strip
P3
B424
P1
P16 Handling Control Board (B419)
P1 Erasure LED Board (B423)
P2
Figure 15

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
Plug
Function
P1
Erasure Interface
P2
Pins
Supply
Connector
Connection to P1 on Erasure LED Board (B423)
CAL Interface
P3
Power Supply
P4
Overheat Protection (S4)
GND (Pin 6)
GND (Pin 7)
Supply Voltage / 10 (Pin 8)
GND (Pin 1)
GND (Pin 2)
+24 V (Pin 3)
+24 V (Pin 4)
IN (Pin 1)
OUT (Pin 2)
Overheat Protection (S4)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Spare Parts List

Document No: DD+DIS247.10M
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
The controlled version of this document resides on Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

spare_parts_e_template_v09
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper
operation.
INSTRUCTION:
Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.

Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com.
NOTE:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 2
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Document History
Edition,
Revision
1.0
Release
Date
06-2011
Changes compared to previous Version

Initial Release
NOTE:
Agfa reserves the right to deliver compatible parts or alternative parts.
Prices to the original order may differ.
Refurbished Spare Parts are indicated with Prefix RF+.
For more details contact your local Service Manager, e.g. availability or country specific rules.
Disclaimer
Agfa HealthCare warrants that the delivered products/spare parts have at least the same
functionalities (or an upgraded version). In case compatible or alternative products/spare
parts are delivered prices to the original order may differ as these products/spare parts will
be invoiced at current prices.
Contact
Spare Parts ordering
Europe
Orderprocessing-europe@matrium.net
Overseas
Orderprocessing-overseas@matrium.net
Spare Parts returns

Worldwide
Returns@matrium.net
NOTE:
Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of the human
health and the environment.
For information about electronic and electrical waste equipment disposal, recovery and
collection points, please contact your local waste disposal service or producer / distributor of
this equipment.
If your equipment contains removable batteries or accumulators please dispose of these
separately according to local regulations.
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 3
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Contents
CR MD 4.0 T Kassette
Cassette CR MD 4.0 T
Cassette CR MD 4.0 T
Pages 18 - 19
Verkleidung
Cover
Revtement
Pages 6 - 7
Slow-Scan Einheit
Slow-Scan Unit
Unite Slow-Scan
Pages 12 - 15
Transporteinheit
Tranport Unit
Module de Transport
Pages 10 - 11
Schublade
Input Tray
bac film
Pages 8 - 9

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 4
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
How to navigate the Spare Parts List online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1)
(2)
Open Bookmarks.
(3)
(4)
See overview of the modules.
(5)
Appropriate page opens.
(6)
Click on green arrow to
Click on "CONTENTS".
Click on requested module.
navigate back to the overview

of the modules.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 5
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
01
07
02
09
06
05
03
08
04
5175_200_chap05_01.cdr
COVER
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 6
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9517815250
ABDECKHAUBE
TOP COVER
CAPOT
CM+6018180
SEITE LINKS, LACKIERT

LEFT COVER
RVETEMENT GAUCHE
CM+9517515041
SEITE RECHTS, LACKIERT

RIGHT COVER
RVETEMENT DROITE
CM+9517815150
FRONT KOMPLETT
FRONT COVER
REVTEMENT L'AVANT
CM+9517515800
USER INTERFACE
USER INTERFACE BOARD
USER INTERFACE BOARD
CM+9517840100
SICHERHEITSSCHALTER
SAFETY SWITCH
INTERRUPTEUR DE SCURIT
CM+9048614200
NETZTEIL
POWER SUPPLY
ALIMENTATION AVEC INTERRUPTEUR
CM+9517885850
EIN-AUSSCHALTER MIT KABELBAUM

MAIN SWITCH WITH WIRE HARNESS
INTERRUPTEUR AVEC HARNAIS DE CBLE
CM+9047711120
USB KABEL
USB CABLE
CABLE USB
= Assembly
* = Spare part standardly is not kept in stock, extended delivery time is possible.
99 = Spare Part is not shown in Exploded Views.
RF+: Refurbished Spare Parts
COVER
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 7
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
05
01
04 (M3)
03
06
06
08
02
09
07
10
11 (M1)
12 (M17)
5175_200_chap05_02.cdr
INPUT TRAY
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 8
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9517514100
BRSTE KOMPL. GROSS (BUCHSE 4MM)

BRUSH COMPLETE LARGE (BUSHING 4MM)
BROSSE COMPLET GRAND (DOUILLE 4MM)
CM+9517852000
KASSETTENFFNER KOMPLETT
CASSETTE OPENER ASSEMBLY
SYSTME D'OUVERTURE CASSETTE
CM+9517886101
TAG READER KABEL

TAG READER CABLE
CABLE TAG READER
CM+9517885300
MOTOR (KASSETTENFFNER) (M3)

MOTOR (CASSETTE OPENER) (M3)
MOTEUR (SYSTME D'OUVERTURE CASSETTE) (M3)
CM+9048614170
CHIP READER
CHIP READER
CHIP READER
CM+9517840050
ZAHNRIEMEN SET
SET OF TOOTHED BELTS
COURROIE CRANTE
CM+9517845100
BOARD ABWICKLUNGSSTEUERUNG
HANDLING CONTROL BOARD
CARTE CONTRLE DROULEMENT
CM+9517886300
USER INTERFACE KABEL

USER INTERFACE CABLE
CABLE USER INTERFACE
CM+9517886200
IP SENSOR KABEL
IP SENSOR CABLE
CABLE IP SENSOR
10
CM+9517858000
KASSETTENKLEMMER
CASSETTE FIXATION UNIT
SERRAGE DE CASSETTES
11
CM+9517858100
MOTOR (KASSETTENKLEMMER) (M1)

MOTOR (CASSETTE FIXING) (M1)
MOTEUR (SERRAGE DE CASSETTES) (M1)
12
CM+9517856000
KASSETTENENTRIEGLER
CASSETTE UNLATCH ASSEMBLY
CASSETTE DEVERROUILLAGE
= Assembly
INPUT TRAY
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 9
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
01
02
08*
09
07 (M5)
08*
04
11
04
10
05 (M6)
04
06 (M4)
03
5175_200_chap05_03.cdr
TRANSPORT UNIT
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 10
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9517836000
LSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT
CM+9517860130
FHRUNGSBLECH LSCHEINHEIT
GUIDE PLATE ERASURE UNIT
TLE CONDUCTRICE D'EFFACEMENT
CM+9949969500
SENSOR IR-REFLEX
ROLLER IP SENSOR
PHOTOCELLULE DE REFLEXION
CM+9517840050
ZAHNRIEMEN SET
SET OF TOOTHED BELTS
COURROIE CRANTE
CM+9517860250
MOTOR (WALZENKLEMMER) (M6)

MOTOR (ROLLER CLAMPING) (M6)
MOTEUR (SERRAGE DE ROULEAUX) (M6)
CM+9517860550
MOTOR (TRANSPORTSCHLITTEN) (M4)

MOTOR (DRAWER UNIT) (M4)
MOTEUR (CHARIOT DE TRANSPORT) (M4)
CM+9517845190
MOTOR M5 (TRANSPORTWALZEN) (M5)

MOTOR M5 (TRANSPORT ROLLER) (M5)
MOTEUR M5 (ROULEAUX DE TRANSPORT) (M5)
CM+9517863250
CM+9517864000
WALZENSTUHL OBEN
UPPER ROLLER ASSEMBLY
PAIRE DE ROULEAUX
10
CM+9517867000
TRANSPORTSCHLITTEN
DRAWER UNIT
CHARIOT DE TRANSPORT
11
CM+9517867650
MAGNET, GEKLEBT
SET PERMAMENT MAGNET
FIXATION, COLL
SET EINGABEROLLEN
SET INPUT ROLLERS
SET INPUT ROLLERS
= Assembly
TRANSPORT UNIT
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 11
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
01
02
03
04
06
05
07
5175_200_chap05_04.cdr
SLOW-SCAN UNIT
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 12
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9517827501
OPTIKBAUGRUPPE
OPTIC MODULE
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE
CM+9517845500
CPMI POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD

CM+9517098850
SPEICHERKARTE
SOLID STATE DISK
SOLID STATE DISK
CM+9517821700
CPMI BOARD
CPMI BOARD
BOARD CPMI
CM+6024690
ABHEBEMECHANIK LINKS
LIFTING EQUIPMENT LEFT
DISPOSITIF DE LEVAGE A GAUCHE
CM+9517825000
GETRIEBE MIT MOTOR UND TRANSPORT-WALZEN

GEAR BOX WITH MOTOR AND SCAN ROLLERS
ENGRENAGE
CM+9517825800
MOTOR M2 (SLOW SCAN)

MOTOR M2 (SLOW SCAN)
MOTEUR M2 (SLOW SCAN)
= Assembly
SLOW-SCAN UNIT
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 13
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
01*
02
03
07
04
06
05
5175_200_chap05_05.cdr
SLOW-SCAN UNIT
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 14
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9517831403
PMT + LICHTSAMMLER
PMT + LIGHT COLLECTOR
PMT + CONDUIT DE LUMIRE
CM+9517830202
REFLEKTOR MIT BRSTE

REFLECTOR WITH BRUSH
REFLECTEUR AVEC BROSSE
CM+9517826500
SCHAUMWALZE VOLLSTNDIG
UPPER SCAN ROLLERS
UPPER SCAN ROLLERS
CM+9517824130
CM+6024710
ABHEBEMECHANIK RECHTS
LIFTING EQUIPMENT RIGHT
DISPOSITIF DE LEVAGE A DROITE
CM+9517824840
LEITBLECH BERGABE
GUIDE PLATE SCANNER INPUT
GUIDE PLATE SCANNER INPUT
CM+9517824700
KALIBRIERPLATINE MONT.
CALIBRATION BOARD
CALIBRATION BOARD
GLASSCHEIBE IM SCANNER
PANE IN SCANNER
VITRE DE SCANNER
= Assembly
SLOW-SCAN UNIT
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 15
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
SMALL PARTS AND TOOLS

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 16
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9517591600
CR30 LIMIT PATTERN CD1.0

CM+6027410
USB-STICK MITSW CIR_0005

USB-STICK WITH SOFTWARE CIR_0005
USB-STICK AVEC SW CIR_0005
CM+6027470
ADAPTERPLATTE CR30-X 2ND

ADAPTOR BASE PLATE CR30-X 2ND
PLATE ADAPTEUR CR30-X 2ND
= Assembly
SMALL PARTS AND TOOLS

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 17
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
REAR SIDE
06* - 11*
01* - 05*
5175_200_CHAP05_07.CDR
CASSETTE CR MD 4.0 T
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 18
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9518052002
SCHUBLADE + IP 35X43
TRAY + IP 35X43
TIROIR + IP 35X43
CM+9518152001
TRAY + IP 35X35
TIROIR + IP 35X35
CM+9518252002
TRAY + IP 24X30
TIROIR + IP 24X30
CM+9518352002
TRAY + IP 18X24
TIROIR + IP 18X24
CM+9518452002
TRAY + IP 15X30
TIROIR + IP 15X30
CM+9518053002
LEERKASSETTE 35X43
BLANK CASSETTE 35X43
CASSETTE BLANC 35X43
CM+9518153000
LEERKASSETTE 35X35
CM+9518253002
LEERKASSETTE 24X30
CM+9518353002
LEERKASSETTE 18X24
10
CM+9518453002
LEERKASSETTE 15X30
11
CM+9518012201
CR-30 FLFS KASSETTE

CR-30 FLFS CASSETTE
CASSETTE CR-30 FLFS
= Assembly
CASSETTE CR MD 4.0 T
06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 19
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Spare Parts Kit Categories

R
Parts required to repair a machine
'Repair'
Kit `R` should be part of the field service engineers` car stock.
Quantity covers requirements for ca. 10 machines.
Adapt quantity locally depending on:
'Installation'
Number of machines
Extension of the service area
Local service structure (centralized / decentralized)
Stockpilling
Parts required to install a machine

Kit `I` should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts to perform the installation (does not comprise parts
included in the shipment).
Quantity covers one single machine installation.
M 'Maintenance'
Parts required to maintain a machine

Kit `M` should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts required to perform a maintenance according to the
maintenance checklist.
Quantity covers one single maintenance.
Extremely expensive or bulky parts

Kit `L` should be part of the local central warehouse.
Determine quantity depending on costs and on the installed base.
'Local stock'
Spare Parts Kit Order Numbers

Not available

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 20
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS247.10M
Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Type Number
Specification
CR 30-X 2/60 Digitizer
5175/0200
5QTR4
CR 30-X 2/35 Digitizer
5175/0205
5RVQK
CR White 2/60 Digitizer
5175/0220
5RVRM
CR White 2/35 Digitizer
5175/0225
5RVSO
Device Name
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Order Number
Accessory
TABLE FOR CR30-X
EWRP3
ALL IN ONE CART
E2M3H

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175/200/205/220/225
Chapter 5 / 21
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 9
Imaging Services
Maintenance
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
This document is separately available. Order number: DD+DIS231.10E

eq_09_maintenance_e_template_v08
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance
Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance

This document contains all routines and tests to be carried out during maintenance.
It describes all must maintenance periodical steps in chronological suitable order.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial Version
Document
Title
DD+DIS230.10E

Chapter 3.5 - Replacements / Repair Procedures
DD+DIS230.10E

Chapter 3.2 - Tools and auxiliary means
DD+DIS230.10E

Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibrations

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance
LIST OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION ON PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .............................................6

1.1
Maintenance Frequency ...........................................................................................................6
1.2
Required Time...........................................................................................................................6
1.3
Required Documents ................................................................................................................6
1.4
Required Software ....................................................................................................................6
1.5
Required Tools..........................................................................................................................7
1.6
Required Cleaning Material ......................................................................................................8
1.7
Required Lubrication Material ...................................................................................................8
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................................9
2.1
Questioning of the Customer ....................................................................................................9
2.2
Analyzing the Info Counter........................................................................................................9
2.3
Documenting the Technical Image Quality of the System......................................................10
2.3.1
Preparing the Image Plate ......................................................................................................10
2.3.2
Erasing the Cassette...............................................................................................................12
2.3.3
Exposing the Cassette ............................................................................................................13
2.3.4
MAINTENANCE POWER OFF............................................................................................15

3.1
Checking of Power and Network Cable ..................................................................................15
3.2
Checking of the Covers...........................................................................................................16
3.3
Checking of the Cables...........................................................................................................16
3.4
Checking of the IP Guide Plate...............................................................................................17
3.5
Checking of the four Belt Drives .............................................................................................17
3.6
Performing a mechanical Check of the Drawer Slider ............................................................18
3.7
Performing a visual Check of the Transport Rollers ...............................................................18
3.8
Performing a visual Check of all Stepper Motors....................................................................18
3.9
Cleaning the Inside .................................................................................................................19
3.10
Cleaning the Erasure Unit.......................................................................................................19
3.11
Cleaning the Prescan Antistatic Brush ...................................................................................20

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance
3.12
Greasing the Spindle at the Cassette Fixation Unit ................................................................21
3.13
Reassembling of the removed Parts.......................................................................................21
3.14
Checking the Cassette Condition............................................................................................22
MAINTENANCE POWER ON..............................................................................................22

4.1
Checking the Safety Switch ....................................................................................................23
4.2
Performing a Stall Calibration .................................................................................................23
4.3
Performing Test Cycles...........................................................................................................24
TECHNICAL IMAGE QUALITY CHECK OF THE SYSTEM...................................................24

5.1
Exposing the Cassette ............................................................................................................24
5.2
Cleaning of the Scan Line and the Mirror ...............................................................................25
5.3
5.4
Checking the Image at the Lightbox or Viewing Station .........................................................26
COMPLETION OF THE MAINTENANCE...............................................................................27

6.1
Resetting the Maintenance Indicator ......................................................................................28
6.2
Creating a Backup of Device specific Data.............................................................................28
6.3
Performing the Customer Conversation .................................................................................28
MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST ................................................................................................29

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance
General Information on Preventive Maintenance

To ensure quality and functional reliability of the system all the points listed below
(minimum maintenance points) must be carried out.
IMPORTANT:
Check if it is necessary to include country specific regulations as additional
maintenance points.
1.1
Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out (whatever comes first):
1.2
Every 30.000 image plate cycles or
Every 2 years
Required Time
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 2 hours
1.3
Required Documents
For a list of required documents see the front page of this document.
Recommendation:
Download the complete Service Manual from the Agfa HealthCare Library:
<Computed Radiography CR Digitizer CR 30-X 2nd>
1.4
Required Software
Make sure that the latest digitizer software is available on the Service PC to be
prepared for a software upgrade during the preventive maintenance. The latest
software can be downloaded from the Agfa HealthCare Library:
<Computed Radiography CR Digitizer CR 30-X 2nd Software>

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
1.5
Maintenance
Required Tools
TX 20

1.5 mm Copper Filter

USB Stick
Checked to be virus free
Spare part number*: CM+6027410

Network Cable
Lint free cloth

Flash light

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
1.6
Maintenance
Required Cleaning Material

Following cleaning material is required:
Description
Order Number*
Vacuum cleaner (220/240 V, 50-60 Hz)
CM+9 9999 0895 0

Or a comparable vacuum cleaner:
Dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x)
CM+9 9999 0896 0
CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner (2 bottles)
10+9999911970
Lint-free cloth
Commercially available: Acquire locally
1.7
Required Lubrication Material

Description
Order Number*
Isoflex Topas NB52 (50 ml)
CM+9 9999 9247 0

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance
Diagnostics
2.1
Questioning of the Customer

(1)
2.2
Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last maintenance.
Analyzing the Info Counter

NOTE:
Retrieving the info counter can be made via Service PC or via NX workstation.
Here is described: Via NX workstation
(1)
(2)
Open the Internet Explorer.
(3)

NX workstation.
(4)
Select in the service menu: <Device Info Info Counter>
(5)
Check the image plate cycles since last maintenance and the last maintenance
date. Enter these values in the maintenance checklist (see section 7).
(6)
Check the errors since last maintenance.
(7)
Check whether service documents provides information on error solutions

e.g. by HW modifications, software upgrades etc. If applicable implement the
provided solution.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance
2.3
Documenting the Technical Image Quality of the System
2.3.1
Preparing the Image Plate

(1)

If the largest available cassette is a Full Leg / Full Spine (FLFS) Cassette, use
this cassette.
Genrad Cassette
FLFS Cassette
FLFS
FLFS
Figure 1
(2)
Open the cassette with the

dedicated key or a pen.
517509ag.cdr
Figure 2

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance
(3)
Open the shutter.
(4)
Turn the cassette around, so that

the black tube side is above.
(5)
Let the black tray and image plate

slide out carefully onto the table.
1
2
517509ad.cdr
Figure 3
(6)
Put the black tray with the image

plate onto the cassette.
(7)
Check the image plate for any

contaminations or signs of damage
(e.g. dust particles, scratches).
Figure 4
(8)
If the image plate is contaminated clean it with the CR screen cleaner and
a soft lint-free cloth.
If the image plate is damaged take another cassette and inform the customer.
IMPORTANT for cleaning:
Do not put the CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner directly on the image plate.
Always put the CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner on the lint-free cloth.
(9)
Wait approximately 10 minutes until the surface is dry.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance
(10) Verify that the white phosphor side

is oriented to the black tube side
of the cassette.
(11) Put the image plate back into the
cassette so that the shutter does
not scratch over the image plate.
(12) Insert the key or a pen into the
cassette.
White phosphor side
Black tube side of the cassette

517509af.cdr
(13) Close the shutter.
Figure 5
(14) Remove the key.
2.3.2
Erasing the Cassette

(1)
Press the Erase button.

The Digitizer switches to erase
mode. The status indicator is
continuously lighting up in blue.
5175_c01_006.ai
Figure 6
(2)
Put the cassette in the digitizer:

Erasing starts.
5175_c01_005.ai
Figure 7
(3)
Remove the cassette with the erased image plate from the cassette output.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
2.3.3
Maintenance

(1)
(2)
Mount the 1.5 mm Cu filter at

the modality.
shown in Figure 8.
The black side of the cassette
must show towards the tube.
X-Ray tube
Anode
Axys
Black Side
of Cassette
NOT OK
OK
517509aa.cdr
Figure 8
(3)

is fully exposed. The collimated field
must be larger than the image plate.
Exposed area
NOT OK
OK
517509ac.cdr
Figure 9
(4)
Select the following parameters using a 1.5 mm Cu filter to obtain

a dose of 10 Gy:
12 mAs
75 kVp
large focus
(5)
Expose the cassette with 10 Gy.
(6)
Turn the cassette by 180 and expose it again.

After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed in total
with a dose of 20 Gy.
(7)
Remove the 1.5 mm Cu-filter from the modality.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
2.3.4
Maintenance

(1)
(2)

IMPORTANT:
By selection of examination type "System Diagnosis Flatfield", the
correct settings for image processing of the flatfield are used. Any other
examination type may give a result which cannot be compared with the
limit pattern.
(3)
(4)
Wait till the digitizer has finished the scan process.
(5)
(6)
Keep the image as reference image "before maintenance".
(7)
Put the scanned cassette aside. It is used again for checking the image quality
at the end of the preventive maintenance.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance
Maintenance Power Off

The maintenance power off is split up into the following steps:
Step
Section
Checking of power and network cable.
3.1
Checking of the covers.
3.2
Checking of the cables.
3.3
Checking of the IP guide plate.
3.4
Checking of the four belt drives.
3.5
Performing a mechanical check of the drawer slider.
3.6
Performing a visual check of the transport rollers.
3.7
Performing a visual check of all Motors.
3.8
Cleaning the inside.
3.9
10
Cleaning the erasure unit.
3.10
11
Cleaning the prescan antistatic brush.
3.11
12
Greasing the spindle at the cassette fixation unit.
3.12
13
Reassembling of the removed parts.
3.13
14
Checking the cassette condition.
3.14
NOTE:
When performing a visual check of the digitizer make sure that the components are
not damaged. If damage is visible replace the defective part.
For more information of the replacement refer to the CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual,
chapter 3.5 Replacements / Repair Procedures.
3.1
Checking of Power and Network Cable

(1)
Switch off the digitizer.
(2)
Unplug the mains and network cable at the digitizer.
(3)
Check the condition of both cables for:
Damages at insulation
Symptoms of bending or squeezing

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
3.2
Maintenance
Checking of the Covers

CAUTION:
Carefully remove the top cover.
3.3
(1)
Remove all covers of the digitizer. For instructions refer to CR 30-X 2nd
Service Manual, chapter 3.5 Replacements / Repair Procedures.
(2)
Check all covers for damages (e.g. cracks).
Checking of the Cables

(1)
Check the condition of all cables

inside of the digitizer.
(2)
Have a close look to the cables

that are moved when the cassette
unit is opened. See Figure 10.
Figure 10
(3)
Remove the screw which fixates

the Handling Control Board and
lift the board slightly up.
(4)
Check the flexible cable of the

Chip Card Reader for any signs
of damage.
Figure 11

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
3.4
Maintenance
Checking of the IP Guide Plate

CAUTION:
(1)
Remove the Erasure Unit and IP guide plate. Refer to CR 30-X 2nd Service
Manual, chapter 3.5 Replacements / Repair Procedures.
(2)
Check the condition of the IP

guide plate. It may not be bent
or damaged (e.g. scratches).
Figure 12
3.5
Checking of the four Belt Drives

(1)
Check the condition of the 4 belt

drives in the cassette unit.
Transport Roller Motor Belt

Roller Clamping Motor Belt
Drawer Motor Belt
Especially check for:
Abrasion in the area of the

belts
Worn out belts (e.g. broken

steel cores)
Worn out gears
Toothed Belt for

Opener Motor M3
belts_cassette_unit.cdr
(2)
Move the belts forward and

backward manually when checking.
Figure 13

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
3.6
Maintenance
Performing a mechanical Check of the Drawer Slider

(1)
Move the slider backward: It must

move smoothly.
(2)
Put the slider back to home position

(i.e. attached to the magnets)
Figure 14
3.7
Performing a visual Check of the Transport Rollers

(1)
Check that the surface of the

transport rollers in the cassette
unit is free from defects.
Figure 15
3.8
Performing a visual Check of all Stepper Motors

NOTE:
The following conditions listed below are prerequisites to perform a successful
stall calibration. For more information refer section 4.2 Performing a Stall Calibration.
(1)
Check the following conditions of the stepper motors which are using a
stall detection (home/end position):
Smooth-running of the motor drive
Functionality of the mechanism for detection of the home/end position
No barriers in the movement available

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
3.9
Maintenance
Cleaning the Inside

REQUIRED TOOLS:
Vacuum cleaner
(1)
3.10
Clean the inside with a vacuum cleaner.

Especially check for dust in the IP transport unit, and clean this thoroughly
with the vacuum cleaner.
Cleaning the Erasure Unit

REQUIRED TOOLS:
Lint-free cloth
WARNING:
During operation the erasure unit is hot: Risk of burns.
200
CAUTION:
Sensitive surface. Reduced image quality possible due to clouded reflector.
Do not touch the reflector of the erasure unit by hand.
Do not use cleaning agents to clean the reflector.
Only use a lint-free cloth for cleaning.
(1)
Check the reflector, i.e. the lower side of the erasure unit.
(2)
Remove dust or any other particles with a lint-free cloth.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
3.11
Maintenance
Cleaning the Prescan Antistatic Brush

(1)
Remove the Optic Module.

Refer to CR 30-X 2nd
Service Manual, chapter 3.5
Replacements / Repair
Procedures.
(2)
Check the Prescan Antistatic

Brush for contamination by using
a flash light.
Figure 16
(3)
If dust is visible, clean the area

before the Prescan Antistatic
Brush with a small vacuum
cleaner nozzle.
Figure 17

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
3.12
Maintenance
Greasing the Spindle at the Cassette Fixation Unit

IMPORTANT:
Be careful when putting grease at the spindle. When grease gets into the digitizer
it can affect the image quality or the functionality of the digitizer.
(1)
Put some grease (Isoflex Topas

NB 52) at the spindle in the area
of the spindle nut.
5175_c09_002.ai
Figure 18
3.13
Reassembling of the removed Parts

(1)
Reassemble the removed parts:
Optic Module
IP Guide Plate
Erasure Unit
Covers
(2)
Connect the mains and network cable.
(3)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
3.14
Maintenance
Checking the Cassette Condition

(1)
Check the following items of the cassettes:

Outside of the cassette:
No signs of wear or defects like cracks, broken layers, buckling of the

cassette, split off parts, worn or loose protection edges
Proper function of the shutter

Inside of the cassette:
No signs of wear or defects like detached fleece, cracks or split off parts
No signs of wear or defects of the tray like cracks, split off parts especially
on the rear edges
No contamination or signs of wear or defects of the IP like any kind of

particles, traces of glue, twisted edges, buckling of the IP, split off parts
of the layer or scratches
(2)
If any of the above listed symptoms are detected, separate the defective
cassettes or IPs and instruct the operator / customer about the possible risks
of using defective cassettes or IPs.
NOTE:
It is strongly recommended to replace affected cassettes or IPs, if any of the above
listed symptoms are detected.
Maintenance Power On
The maintenance power on is split up into the following steps:
Step
Section
Checking the safety switch
4.1
Performing a stall calibration for all motors
4.2
Performing test cycles for each used cassette format
4.3

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
4.1
4.2
Maintenance
Checking the Safety Switch

(1)
Pull out the cassette unit approximately 1 cm (0.4 in). The safety switch has
to switch off the digitizer.
(2)
Close the cassette unit.
Performing a Stall Calibration

NOTE:
Only perform a stall calibration, if a specific error exists.
(1)
(2)
Open the browser.
(3)

NOTE:
NX workstation.
(4)
training).
(5)
Select in the service menu: <Maintain and calibrate Stall

Calibration>
(6)
Wait till the stall calibration is finished. This takes approximately 5 minutes.
For more information to the Stall Calibration refer to CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual
chapter 3.6 Adjustments and Calibrations.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
4.3
Maintenance
Performing Test Cycles

(1)
Insert the cassette in the digitizer.

NOTE:
Perform the test cycle with every used cassette format.
(2)
In the Service GUI select: <Analysis and Repair Endurance Run

Cycle>
(3)
Keep the default settings.
(4)
Select START.
(5)
Check for proper IP transport and abnormal noise.
(6)
Repeat this test cycle for all other cassette formats used at the site.
Technical Image Quality Check of the System

The technical image quality check is split up into the following steps:
5.1
Step
Section
5.1
Clean the Scan Line
5.2
Scan the flatfield image
5.3
Checking the Image at the Lightbox or Viewing Station
5.4

Use the same cassette as in the beginning of the preventive maintenance.
Refer to the instructions in section 2.3 of this document.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
5.2
Maintenance
Cleaning of the Scan Line and the Mirror

(1)
Check the condition of the cleaning

brush (e.g. brush is not dirty or
damaged).
(2)
Clean the scan line by wiping with

the cleaning brush a few times
over the whole scan length.
The last movement must be
continuous from rear to front.
Figure 19
5.3

(1)
(2)

IMPORTANT:
By selection of examination type "System Diagnosis Flatfield", the
correct settings for image processing of the flatfield are used. Any other
examination type may give a result which cannot be compared with the
limit pattern.
(3)
(4)
Wait till the digitizer has finished the scan process.
(5)

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
5.4
Maintenance

NOTE:
Checking the images and comparing to the limit patterns may only happen on
lightboxes and viewing stations that comply with the specified installation and
configuration conditions for diagnostic reading. For details please refer to the
respective instructions of the viewing stations / light boxes.
NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always parallel to the short side of the image plate
(except 35 x 35 cm cassettes). Due to the hanging protocol* the appearance of the
saved flatfield might differ from the physical orientation of the cassette as it has
entered the digitizer.
* The hanging protocol (DICOM expression) defines the format and presentation how the images are
displayed on the monitor.
43 cm
30 cm
30 cm
24 cm
Slow scan 35 cm
direction
24 cm
15 cm
18 cm
517509ab.cdr
Figure 20
(1)
Check the image quality of the flatfield for the following artifacts:
Stripes in fast scan or slow scan direction
Large area inhomogeneities
Unacceptable number of white dots.
Evaluation:
(2)
If the scanned flatfield does not show one of the artifacts, no further action
is required.
(3)
If the scanned flatfield shows one of the artifacts compare the flatfield with the
limit pattern. For detailed instructions refer to CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual,
chapter 3.2 Tools and auxiliary Means.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance
IMPORTANT:
If a FLFS cassette for flatfield exposure is used, the image will be slightly darker
in the upper and lower image area where the backscatter protection is removed
(approximately 1 cm each). These darker zones also have to be used for image
quality evaluation in slow scan and fast scan direction.
Flatfield with Genrad Cassette
Flatfield with FLFS Cassette
Effect exaggerated
Genrad Cassette
FLFS Cassette
Backscatter
Protection
FLFS
10 mm
10 mm
FLFS
Figure 21
Completion of the Maintenance

The completion of the maintenance is split up into the following steps:
Step
Section
Resetting the Maintenance Indicator
6.1
Creating a Backup of Device specific Data
6.2
Performing the Customer Conversation
6.3

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS231.10E
6.1
Maintenance

(1)
In the digitizer service menu select: <Maintenance Indicator>
(2)
Select: <Reset of Maintenance Indicator>

NOTE:
Resetting the maintenance indicator also resets the relative counters.
6.2
6.3

(1)
In the service menu select: <Backup & Restore>
(2)
Leave default settings.
(3)
Select <Complete Backup> to perform a backup.
(4)
Select <Save to PC Hard disk>.
(5)
Select <Logout>.
(6)
Copy the Backup ZIP file from The NX Workstation to the digitizer USB stick
and the Service PC.

(1)
Fill out the Maintenance checklist and hand it out to the customer.
(2)
Explain the results of the maintenance to the customer.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Maintenance
Checklist
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance Checklist
Digitizer Serial Number:
Image Plate Cycles and months since last

maintenance:
The maintenance has to be carried out:
Every 30.000 Image Plate Cycles or
Every 2 years
NOTE:
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions:
DD+DIS231.10E
Diagnostics
OK
Not OK
Solved
OK
Not OK
Solved
Questioning of the customer

Analyzing the Info Counter
Documenting the Technical Image Quality of the System
Maintenance points - Power off

Checking of Power and Network Cable
Checking of the Covers
Checking of the Cables
Checking of the IP Guide Plate
Checking of the four Belt Drives
Performing a mechanical Check of the Drawer Slider
Performing a visual Check of the Transport Rollers
Performing a visual Check of the Stepper Motors
Cleaning the Inside
Cleaning the Erasure Unit
Cleaning the Prescan Antistatic Brush
Greasing the Spindle at the Cassette Fixation Unit

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Maintenance
Checklist
DD+DIS231.10E
Maintenance points - Power off
OK
Not OK
Solved
OK
NOT OK Solved
OK
NOT OK Solved
OK
NOT OK Solved
Reassembling of the removed Parts

Checking the Cassette Condition
Maintenance points - Power on

Checking the Safety Switch
Performing a Stall Calibration
Performing Test Cycles
Technical Image Quality Check of the System

Cleaning of the Scan Line and the Mirror
Completion
Remarks:
.............................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician
.........................................................
Date / Signature Customer

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 10
Imaging Services
Service Bulletins
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the Agfa HealthCare Library:
Agfa HealthCare Library Computed Radiography CR Digitizers CR 30-X 2nd
Service Bulletin *
* For external partners: Please ask your local Agfa representative for access.


service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v02
DD+DIS230.10E
Service Bulletins
This page is intentionally left blank to enable print out of even and odd pages on duplex printers.

08-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Chapter 10 / 2
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 11
Imaging Services
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
This document is separately available. Order number: DD+DIS229.10E

eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v08
DD+DIS229.10E
Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E

This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried
out on site prior to the machine delivery.
This chapter is divided into:
Construction planning data
Technical connection and performance data
Safety instructions, listing of certificates
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
1.0
06-2011
Initial Version
Document
Title
Not applicable

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
LIST OF CONTENTS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................6

1.1
System Overview ......................................................................................................................6
1.2
Workflow of a CR 30-X 2nd System .........................................................................................7
SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES.........................................................................8

2.1
Scope of Delivery......................................................................................................................8
2.2
Accessories...............................................................................................................................9
ROOM PREPARATION..........................................................................................................10
3.1
SYSTEM INTEGRATION .......................................................................................................11

4.1
Minimum required free Space for Operation and Maintenance..............................................10
Integration of the CR 30-X 2nd into the Hospital Network......................................................11
CLIMATIC AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS..............................................................................13

5.1
Conditions during Transport and Storage...............................................................................13
5.2
Condition during Operating .....................................................................................................13
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................14

6.1
Electrical Connections at the Digitizer ....................................................................................17
6.2
Electrical Connections at the optional UPS ............................................................................17
DIGITIZER DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT ..............................................................................18

7.1
Digitizer with closed Covers....................................................................................................18
7.2
Digitizer with Front Cover opened...........................................................................................18
7.3
Dimensions of the Digitizer including Packaging ....................................................................19
7.4
Dimensions of the Pallet .........................................................................................................19
7.5
Weight of the Digitizer.............................................................................................................19
7.6
Dimensions of the All-in-one Cart (Optional) ..........................................................................20
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................21
8.1
Type Overview ........................................................................................................................21
8.2
Functional Data .......................................................................................................................22
8.3
Electrical Data of Digitizer.......................................................................................................22
8.4
Functional Data of the optional UPS.......................................................................................23

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
8.5
Climatic Data...........................................................................................................................23
8.6
Acoustic Noise Level...............................................................................................................23
8.7
Boot-up Time and Warm-up Time...........................................................................................24
8.8
Interface Data..........................................................................................................................24
8.9
Service Data............................................................................................................................24
8.10
Functional Data Image Plates.................................................................................................24
SAFETY STANDARDS...........................................................................................................25
10
INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST..............................................................................27

10.1
Installation Planning Checklist ................................................................................................27
10.2
Installation Readiness Checklist .............................................................................................29

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
Product Description
This document describes the installation planning of the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer.
The CR 30-X 2nd, Type 5175 comprises the following subtypes:
The differences between the different subtypes are described in section 8.1 and 8.2.
For the installation of the complete system it is additionally required to perform
all steps described in the NX Workstation Installation Planning document.
Refer to the Agfa HealthCare Library:
1.1
System Overview
The CR 30-X 2nd digitizer is part of the CR system, consisting of:
Digitizer
Cassettes with Image Plate (IP)
NX Workstation
Digitizer
NX Workstation
Tower Version
NX Workstation
Laptop Version
Digitizer
Cassette
Cassette
517511ea.cdr
Figure 1

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
1.2
Workflow of a CR 30-X 2nd System

The following Figure indicates a typical workflow of a CR 30-X 2nd system:
1
Take exposure.
5
Take cassette
for next exposure.
2
Insert exposed cassette
in digitizer:
The image plate is prepared
for scanning
3
Go to NX Workstation
and select patient:
The digitizer starts scanning
4
Wait till image plate cycle
is finished (approximately 1 minute).
517502ah.cdr
Figure 2
Step :
Take the exposure.
Step :
Insert the exposed cassette into the digitizer.
Step :
Go to the NX workstation. Select the patient from the worklist and select
the ID* button. The IP** cycle starts.
Step :
Wait till the IP** cycle is finished. This takes approximately 1 minute.
For the subtypes 205 and 225 it takes approximately 1.5 minutes.
The digitizer sends the image data during scanning (i.e. during the
IP cycle) to the NX workstation.
Step :
Take out the cassette for the next examination.
ID = Identify
** IP = Image Plate

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
Scope of Delivery and Accessories
2.1
Scope of Delivery
Quantity
Description
Digitizer
Packing list for Accessory
CE declaration of conformity
Enclosure with information concerning RoHS*
Installation Procedure, DD+DIS280.10E

(Chapters 1 and 11 of the Technical Documentation)
Power cable, Europe 3.00 m
Power cable, US 3.00 m
Network cable 5 m / 16 feet long
1.5 mm CU filter
USB stick with Software for the digitizer
Torx Key TX20
CD with limit patterns for flatfield evaluation
CD with User Manuals in all specified languages**
* RoHS = Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances

** Language: Chinese-simplified, Chinese-traditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French,
German, Greek, Italian, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai,
Vietnamese, Estonian, Hungarian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Slovak, Slovenian, Turkish
IMPORTANT:
The digitizer is ordered and delivered with a dedicated NX workstation. It is not
possible to connect the digitizer to another type of Agfa CR workstation (e.g. QS 3.5).
NOTE:
The digitizer is delivered with all parts, which are required to set up the device
into operation.
Number and format of cassettes / image plates are depending on the individual order.
IMPORTANT:
The digitizer is delivered with two power cables for US/Europe. If digitizer is installed
outside the US or Europe, organize a power cable for your country locally.
For detailed specifications refer to section 6, Electrical Connections.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
2.2
Accessories
The following accessories are available for the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer:
Warning:
standby generator.
Item
ABC Code
Comment
All-in-one cart
E2M3H
For dimensions refer to section 7.6.
UPS Powerware 5115,

120 V Version
EGPSE
UPS Powerware 5115,

220 V Version
EGPTG
Can be used for digitizer and NX.

For technical specifications refer to
section 8.
Mobile Kit
EWRQ5
See safety note below.

To be used in earthquake areas and in
mobile usage. May not be used in military
vessels.
Rear Mounting Plate
Retainers for digitizer feet
Base Plate
517511bb.cdr
Remote Service
Not applicable See NOTE below.
NOTE to Accessory "Remote Service":

In general it is possible to diagnose and repair the digitizer to a certain extent remotely.
To enable remote service of the digitizer remote access has first to be organized.
Remote Access is established via the Agfa own Secure Remote Service System
(SRSS).
For more information to the SRSS see Agfa HealthCare Library*:
<Technical Services Service Delivery SRSS>
* Only applicable for Agfa Employees.
For external partners: Contact your local Agfa partner.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
Room Preparation
3.1
Minimum required free Space for Operation and Maintenance
CAUTION:
Reduced airflow may lead to pollution in the digitizer.
Keep a minimum of 5 cm (2 inches) between rear side of the digitizer and the wall.
At least 50 cm [19.7 in] space has to be provided on the right hand side to allow
cleaning of the scan line with the cleaning brush. This can be performed by the
customer.
NOTE:
The floor of the installation place must be stable and may not transmit mechanical
vibrations as e.g. footfall sound.
If installed on the optional All-in-one Cart the digitizer can also be installed in a corner;
see section 7.6, Dimensions of the All-in-one Cart.
> 5 [2.0] *
> 50 [19.7]
60 [23.6]
60 [23.6]
80 [31.5]
80 [31.5]
60 [23.6]
60 [23.6]
537511ac.ai
Figure 3: Scale 1:20; Dimensions are in cm [inch]
IMPORTANT:
*The clearance in the rear for electrical connectors and to provide sufficient air flow
has to be at least 5 cm [2.0 in] in any case.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
System Integration
(1)
(2)
Download following documents before installation.
Solution Structure Data Document, Document ID* 30781759

CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326,

By means of these documents check, whether the new ordered system

components and the already available equipment on site (if available) can be
used together in the system.
* Access the document by entering the document ID in the Agfa HealthCare Library search window,
or follow the direct link.
4.1
Integration of the CR 30-X 2nd into the Hospital Network

WARNING:
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths
in different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can
cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power

Source (UPS) as the PC.
WARNING:

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
WARNING:
IMPORTANT:
Unpacking of the digitizer and putting on the table should be done by the
forwarder. For more information refer to the Unpacking instructions.
Recommended table height: 75 cm
Due to the workflow* of the system it is recommended to install digitizer and

NX workstation close together.
* The operator has to go from digitizer to the NX workstation and back to the digitizer for each
scan cycle.
If the laptop version of the NX workstation is used:

Do not place the laptop on top of the CR 30-X 2nd, because the accumulated
heat developed by the digitizer and the laptop may affect the operation of the
system.
The digitizer has to be connected to the NX workstation via network cable (hospital
network).
One NX Workstation can receive images from one digitizer.
The following table gives information for the integration of the digitizer into the
hospital network.
Parameter:
Default value:
IP Address:
192.192.192.192
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Gateway IP Address:
none (empty)
AE Title:
CIR192
Hostname:
cir192
Value:
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
Climatic and ambient Conditions
5.1
Conditions during Transport and Storage
5.2
Storage of packed device
According IEC 721-3-1 Storage: 1K2, 1M2
Transport of packed device
According IEC 721-3-1 Transport: 2K2, 2M2
Ambient temperature during

storage
Minimum:
+5 C (41 F)
Maximum:
+40 C (104 F)
Relative humidity during

storage
Minimum:
5%
Maximum:
85 %
Rate of temperature change

during storage
Maximum:
0,5 C/min
Ambient temperature during

transport
Minimum:
-25 C (-13 F) for maximal 72 h
Maximum:
+55 C (131 F) for maximal 96 h
Condition during Operating

IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the digitizer is not exposed any vibrations or shocks during operation.
Ambient temperature
Relative humidity
Minimum:
+15 C (59 F)
Maximum:
+30 C (86 F)
Best:
+20 C (68 F) to 25 C (77 F)
Minimum:
15 %
Maximum:
80 %
Best:
30 % to 60 %
Magnetic fields:
Maximum 3.8 T in conformance with

EN6100-4-8: level 2
Radiation influences
If the digitizer is installed in the x-ray room,

it has to be protected against scatter radiation.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
WARNING:
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this
way, that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Ambient Light
(Environmental light condition)
The digitizer may not be operated in direct

sun light. No influence on image quality is
guaranteed if operated in ambient light of
maximum 2500 Lux.
High Frequency Emission and

Immunity
For detailed information refer to the digitizer

user manual.
Electrical Connections
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
Position the Agfa products so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection if required.
Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies
and voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or
their engineers.
Installation
guidelines
Mains connection
in the installation
room
Electrical installations have to be done in accordance with

national regulations or statutory requirements, e.g.:
VDE:
(Germany)
Electrical installations in the installation room

must be in compliance with the regulations IEC
364, VDE 0100, and VDE 0107.
UL: (US)
Electrical installations in the installation room

must be in compliance with the regulations:
National Electrical Code" (NEC) (NFPA70).
VDE:
(Germany)
Double earthed pin outlet in compliance with

DIN 49441 and with CEE 7 standard cover V II.
UL: (US)
Earthed contact outlet for the NEMA 5-15 P plug

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
Mains cable
(part of delivery)
EuroVersion:
CEE7/7 - H05VV F3G1 - 3 x 1 mm with

IEC C13 plug (female);
cable length 3 m
CEE7/7
IEC C13
5175_C11_001.cdr
US/CANVersion:
NEMA 5-15P - SJT,

3 x AWG 18 with
IEC C13 plug (female);
Cable length 3 m,
Hospital grade (HG)
IEC C13
NEMA 5-15P
5175_C11_002.cdr
NOTE:
The digitizer is delivered with two power cables for US/Europe. If a different cable is
needed, organize it locally but keep attention to country specific requirements.
Example:
Power cable to be organized locally for US/CAN, if a connection to a 240 V-outlet
instead of the standard 120 V-outlet is needed:
NEMA 6-15P - SJT,3 x AWG 18 with IEC C13 connector (female); Hospital grade (HG)
Network cable
(part of delivery)
UTP; AWG24; Length: 5 m
Mains switch
Upon digitizer installation, it must be ensured that either the

mains connector or an all-pole circuit breaker for the
installation on site is located close to the machine and easily
accessible.
Cables for the optional UPS:

NOTE:
The following cables listed in the tables on next page are only used for the
recommended UPS Powerware 5115. If another Powerware is used the cables
may change.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
UPS Powerware 5115

230 V Version*
USB cable; part of UPS delivery
Extension cable (1.8 m); part of UPS delivery
Extension cable (1.8 m); part of UPS delivery
Mains cable; part of digitizer delivery
*Check which UPS Powerware is needed for the CR 30-X 2nd installation. If another UPS Powerware
version needs to be used, the cables listed in the table may change.
230 V (220 - 240 V) Version

Type 5115 - 750i
USB
4
to wall outlet
Figure 4
UPS Powerware 5115

120 V Version
Mains cable; part of digitizer delivery
Mains cable; part of NX delivery
USB cable; part of UPS delivery
Fixed SJT, 3 x AGW 18 with NEMA 5-15 P

plug: 1.8 m
version needs to be used, the cables listed in the table may change.
120 V (110 - 120 V) Version

Type 5115 - 750
USB
to wall outlet
517501ra.ai
Figure 5

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
6.1
Electrical Connections at the Digitizer

The following figure shows the electrical connections at the digitizer:
Power Supply Input

100 - 240 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC
Mains Switch
Intergrounding
Connector
Network Connector
517511ad.cdr
Figure 6
6.2
Electrical Connections at the optional UPS

The following Figure shows an example of the electrical connections
at the optional UPS:
230 V (220 - 240 V) Version
Type 5115 - 750i
120 V (110 - 120 V) Version

Type 5115 - 750
USB Communication Port

(to NX Workstation)
USB Communication Port

(to NX Workstation)
Four 5 - 15
Receptacles
Four 10 A, IEC-320
Receptacles
Power cord ( 6ft / 1.8 m)

with 5 - 15 Plug
10 A, IEC-320
Input Connector
517511aj.cdr
Figure 7

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
Digitizer Dimensions and Weight
7.1
Digitizer with closed Covers
Dimensions in cm [inch]
54,6 [21.5]
78.2 [30.8]
69.1 [27.2]
517511aa.cdr
Figure 8
7.2
Length (cm / inch)
78.2 / 30.8
Width (cm / inch)
69.1 / 27.2
Height (cm / inch)
54.6 / 21.5
Digitizer with Front Cover opened

Dimensions in cm [inch]
54,6 [21.5]
100.2 [39.5]
69.1 [27.2]
517511ab.cdr
Figure 9
Length (cm / inch)
100.2 / 39.5
Width (cm / inch)
69.1 / 27.2
Height (cm / inch)
54.6 / 21.5

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
7.3
7.4
7.5
Dimensions of the Digitizer including Packaging

Length (cm / inch)
90 / 35.4
Width (cm / inch)
80 / 31.5
Height (cm / inch)
69 / 27.2
Dimensions of the Pallet

Length (cm / inch)
90 / 35.4
Width (cm / inch)
80 / 31.5
Height (cm / inch) inclusive palette
15 / 6
Weight of the Digitizer

Digitizer alone (kg / lb)
72.5 / 159.8
Digitizer with packing inclusive

palette (kg / lb)
106.5 / 234.8

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
7.6
Dimensions of the All-in-one Cart (Optional)

For the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer is an All-in-one Cart available.
NOTE:
The already existing All-in-one Cart of the CR 30-X digitizer (Type 5175 / 100 / 105 /
110 / 120 / 125) with SN < 3.000 requires the installation of an "Adaptor base plate"
to make them compatible for the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer (Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 /
225).
The adaptor base plate can be ordered with spare part number*: CM+6027470
IMPORTANT:
If the customer uses a different table, observe the stability of the table: It must be able
to carry the weight of 72.5 kg (159.8 lb) and may not be subject to excessive shock and
WARNING:
The All-in-one cart consists of:
Table for digitizer
Storage for cassettes
Storage of NX workstation, inclusive:
Monitor
Keyboard
Mouse
Storage of optional UPS
Figure 10

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
155 cm [61 1"]
Dimensions of the All-in-one Cart:
LEFT
75,7 cm [29 8"]
FRONT
.
77,0 cm [30 3"]
70,0 cm [27.6"]
TOP
5175_c11_002.ai
Figure 11: Dimensions in cm [inch]
Specifications
8.1
Type Overview
Type
ABC Code
5175 / 200
5QTR4
5175 / 205
5RVQK
5175 / 220
5RVRM
5175 / 225
5RVSO
Serial Number
50.000

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
8.2
Functional Data
Cassette Type
CD MD 4.0
General plate
and cassette
(GenRad PIP)
CD MD 4.0
FLFS cassette
(GenRad PIP)
Format
(cm)
Resolution
(pixel/mm)
Width x Length
(pixels)
Width x Length
(mm)
15 x 30
10
1440 x 2928
292.8 x 144.0
18 x 24
10
1728 x 2328
172.8 x 232.8
24 x 30
10
2328 x 2928
232.8 x 292.8
35 x 35
10
3480 x 3480
348.0 x 348.0
35 x 43
10
3480 x 4248
348.0 x 424.8
35 x 43
10
3480 x 4406
348.0 x 440.6
Throughput
8.3
Cassette Format
Minimum Number of
Cassettes per hour
Type 5175 / 200
35 x 43
60
Type 5175 / 205
35 x 43
35
Type 5175 / 220
35 x 43
60
Type 5175 / 225
35 x 43
35
Bits per pixel / number of grey steps
16 / 65535
Scan Resolution [m]
100
Image Buffer
256 MB (one complete image)
Electrical Data of Digitizer

Rated voltage [~V]
100 240 AC (autosensing)
Frequency [Hz]
50/60
Power consumption [W]
Standby:
60
Peak:
190
Average of one cycle:
85

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
8.4
Functional Data of the optional UPS
Frequency [Hz]
120 = Default
110 = User adjustable via rear panel
DIP switches
230 = Default
220 or 240 = User adjustable via rear
panel DIP switch
50/60 (autosensing)
Battery runtime [min]
>5
Output Power [W]
750
Dimensions (HxWxD) [mm/in]
192 x 150 x 270 / 7.6 x 5.9 x 10.6
Weight [kg/lb]
7.8 / 17.2
More info
Refer to www.powerware.com
Rated voltage [~V] UPS Powerware

5115-750 (ABC Code: EGPSE)*
Rated voltage [~V] UPS Powerware
5115-750i (ABC Code: EGPTG)*
version needs to be used, the cables listed in the table may change
8.5
Climatic Data
Heat emission [W / BTU]
Standby:
60 / 204
Peak:
190 / 648
Average of one cycle: 85 / 290
8.6
Acoustic Noise Level

Acoustic Noise Level
Standby:
5 dB(A) maximum
according ISO 7779
During scanning:
65 dB(A) maximum

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
8.7
Boot-up Time and Warm-up Time

Boot-up time and Warm-up time [Minutes]
Approximately 1 minute
Warm-up time cold start
Image quality within

specification after boot-up time
Optimum image quality after
30 minutes
8.8
Interface Data
Via Ethernet 10/100 Base Ethernet
(auto-negotiate)*
Interface to NX workstation
* Gigabit Ethernet is not supported.
8.9
8.10
Service Data
Info counter
Yes
Error diagnostics built in
Yes
Remote / preventive service capable
Yes
Functional Data Image Plates

CR MD4.0
Image plate type

Image retention
Within 1 hour
Recommended readout time
After 2 hours
70 % of the stored energy is still present with

no visible loss of information upon readout.
After 24 hours
Image retention still exceeds 45 %.

Slightly reduced images quality

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
Safety Standards
The digitizer complies with:
North American Standards
Federal Communications Commission
Canadian Standards Association
Underwriters Laboratories
Code of Federal Regulations
EMC*
European Norm and International

Standards
European Norm
International Electrotechnical Commission
CSA 22.2 No. 601.1.2
EN 60601-1-2:2007
FCC part 15
EN 300 330-2 V1.1.1:2001

EN 301 489-1 V1.3.1:2001
EN 540: 1993
EN 980: 2003
EN 1041: 1998
ISO 18906: 2000
EN ISO 13485: 2003
Safety
UL60601-1:2003
CSA C 22.2 No. 601.1:1990 +
S1:1994 + A2:1998
CFR parts 1040.10 and
1040.11
CSA-E60825-1-03
IEC 60601-1:1988 + A1:1991 +

A2:1995
IEC 60601-1-1:2000 / EN 606011-1:2001
IEC 60601-1-4:1999 / EN 606011-4:1996 + A1:1999
IEC 60601-1-2: 2001 / EN 606011-2:2001
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 +
A2:2001
* EMC = Electromagnetic Compatibility
The leakage current limits for which this device is tested, excludes installation in the
patient vicinity. Therefore the equipment must be placed outside the patient vicinity
according to the local valid regulation (UL 60601-1 or EN 60601-1).

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS229.10E
The patient vicinity is defined as follows:

UL 60601-1:
o 1.83 m (6 feet) beyond the perimeter of the bed (examination table, dental chair,
treatment booth, and the like)
o Vertical 2.29 m (7.5 feet) above the floor
EN 60601-1:
o 1.5 m (4.9 feet) beyond the perimeter of the bed (examination table, dental
chair, treatment booth, and the like)
o Vertical 2.5 m (8.2 feet) above the floor
R
Patient vicinity
h
Patient vicinity
patient_vicinity.cdr
R = 1.5 m / 4.9 feet (EN 60601-1) or 1.83 m / 6 feet (UL 60601-1)

h = 2.5 m / 8.2 feet (EN 60601-1) or 2.29 m / 7.5 feet (UL 60601-1)
Figure 12
Other equipment that is in contact with the patient is not connected directly
to the Agfa system without additional protective measures.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Checklist
DD+DIS229.10E
10
Installation Planning Checklist
10.1

#
Step
Goal
1.
Ask the Agfa sales

representative for a
contact person in
the hospital.
To schedule an installation date

with the customer.
Make yourself
familiar with the
System Overview.
To see in which environment the

digitizer will be installed.
Make yourself
familiar with the
scope of delivery.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Section
OK
Task
code*
PRI**
1.1
PRI
Basic information, to see

whether additional, site specific
material for installation might be
required.
2.1
PRI
Make yourself
familiar with the
digitizer
specifications.
Hospital employees are involved

in installation and operation of
the digitizer and the list about
technical specifications.
PRI
Check the digitizer

safety standards
and regulations.
Customer / Operator knows the

safety standards and regulations
of the digitizer.
PRI
Check the machine

dimensions.
To check the transport path and

the desired installation place for
sufficient space.
PRI
Ensure the required

free space around
the digitizer.
Installation location complies

with the requirements for
minimum floor space for
operation and service.
3.1
PRI
To get the list of ordered

equipment that needs to be
installed.


06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Checklist
DD+DIS229.10E
Step
Goal
8.
Make an
appointment with
the network
administrator and
check the network
access. Initiate to
establish necessary
amount of IP
addresses at
installation time.
Physical network access is

granted.
Make an
appointment with
the radiologist for
operator training.
Operators are available for

training at date.
Section
OK
Task
code*
IP addresses at hand during

installation
-
PRI
PRI
10. If applicable make

Hospital technician available and
an appointment with prepared to perform mounting of
the hospital
earthquake kit during installation.
technician to mount
the earthquake kit.
PRI
11. Make an
appointment with
the hospital
technician to define
delivery and
transport path.
Knowing where the device will

arrive.
-
PRI
12. Compare the

required ambient
and climatic
conditions with the
condition at the
installation place.
Environmental conditions at the

installation location complies
with the operation conditions of
the digitizer.
PRI
PRI
10.2
PRI
9.
Hospital network sockets

operational at installation point in
time
Knowing the transport path;

clarifying eventual needs for
transportation means.
13. Make an
To be able to initiate all required
appointment with
prerequisites in advance to allow
the house electrician proper electrical connections.
or the authorized
electrician and
check the required
electrical
connection.
14. Check the
installation
readiness during
follow up visit.
To be sure that all required preinstallation conditions are

fulfilled.

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Checklist
DD+DIS229.10E
10.2
Installation Readiness Checklist

In order to guarantee an effective and smooth installation process within the targeted
time frame, the following tasks of the checklist below must be carried out prior to the
installation of the device.
Check and discuss all the required measures for the installation by means of this
checklist. Remarks on the individual items can be noted on the back of the list.
For Agfa employees only:
After completion hand out this checklist to your local Agfa representative.
Name of Field
Service Engineer:
Checking date:
Client name:
Client address:
Contact person,
name and title:
Client phone
number:
Extension:
Type of systems:
Order / OGT*
number:
* OGT = Order Generation Tool, only applicable for Agfa employees

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
Checklist
DD+DIS229.10E
Task
OK
Task code*
OGT = Order Generation Tool, only applicable for

Agfa employees
Installation date scheduled with the customer.

Tasks of Installation Planning Checklist performed
successfully.
Details see section 10.1:
Installation Site ready for Installation
PRI**
PRI**

Remarks:
Signature of Field Service Engineer: _______________________________________

06-2011
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
DD+DIS230.10E
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
1. Edition
DD+DIS230.10E
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
1. Edition
DD+DIS230.10E
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
1. Edition

Agfa CR30-X PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Agfa CR30-X PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

HEALTHCARE

Purpose of this Document

add the order list for documentation.

Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a

Document Node ID: 16099429

Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Integrating the Order List for Documentation

Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Printing single Pages or Chapters

Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.

Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar

Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

Select the page range.

Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".

Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Printing the complete Service Manual

Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"

Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual

Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Exporting your Comments

Figure 5: Drop down menu Comment & Markup

Select Options - Export Selected Comments.

Save the file with any name.

Select Options - Import Comments.

Browse for the comments file and press select.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Document No: DD+DIS230.10E

Agfa Company Confidential

Document Node ID: 30879695

Copyright 2011 Agfa HealthCare N.V.

About this Manual

Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Agfa Company Confidential

About this Manual

Purpose of this Document

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Agfa Company Confidential

About this Manual

Generic Safety Directions

Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

Repair and Service

Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

Tools and auxiliary Means

Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

Adjustments and Calibrations

Software Menus and Setting

Software Releases, Patches

Reference and Circuit Diagrams

Spare Parts List

Manufacturing Standard Modifications

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Agfa Company Confidential

About this Manual

Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user,

Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the

Not-safety relevant Notes

Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally

Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out

Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action

Highlights unusual points.